WO2024027678A1 - Extended discontinuous reception configuration method, apparatus and communication device - Google Patents

Extended discontinuous reception configuration method, apparatus and communication device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024027678A1
WO2024027678A1 PCT/CN2023/110476 CN2023110476W WO2024027678A1 WO 2024027678 A1 WO2024027678 A1 WO 2024027678A1 CN 2023110476 W CN2023110476 W CN 2023110476W WO 2024027678 A1 WO2024027678 A1 WO 2024027678A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
information
ptw
terminal
edrx
srs
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/110476
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
王园园
司晔
邬华明
Original Assignee
维沃移动通信有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 维沃移动通信有限公司 filed Critical 维沃移动通信有限公司
Publication of WO2024027678A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024027678A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/02Arrangements for optimising operational condition
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/20Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/28Discontinuous transmission [DTX]; Discontinuous reception [DRX]

Definitions

  • the present application belongs to the field of communication technology, and specifically relates to an extended discontinuous reception configuration method and device, and communication equipment.
  • the terminal when the terminal is in an idle state, the terminal cannot be positioned. If you want to support the positioning of idle state terminals, you need to solve the problem that when configuring the Core Network (CN) extended DRX cycle (eDRX), the idle state detection reference signal (Sounding Reference Signal, SRS) should How to configure or measure the idle positioning reference signal PRS.
  • CN Core Network
  • eDRX Extended DRX cycle
  • SRS Sounding Reference Signal
  • the power saving mechanism it is possible to introduce the extended DRX cycle (eDRX) of the core network in the inactive state in the future, or the extended DRX cycle (eDRX) of the RAN greater than 10.24s. .
  • eDRX extended DRX cycle
  • the network side device confirm the DRX where the terminal is located, and/or how to configure the detection reference signal or positioning reference signal PRS window under DRX.
  • the configuration information of CN eDRX/DRX is sent to the terminal by the Access and Mobility Management Function (AMF) when the terminal registers; while the base station is in the paging message.
  • the relevant configuration obtained, but the current inactive SRS configuration information is carried by the base station in the Radio Resource Control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) release message. That is to say, when the base station configures the SRS configuration information, it may not know the CN eDRX configuration information, resulting in the SRS configuration not matching the CN eDRX/DRX configuration information, and affecting the terminal's power saving or positioning functions.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the Location Management Function may recommend SRS configuration information to the base station, but LMF neither knows the configuration information of CN eDRX/DRX nor the configuration information of RAN eDRX/DRX, which may cause the recommended The SRS configuration cannot match the DRX configuration information.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide an extended discontinuous reception configuration method and device, and communication equipment, which can reasonably configure the terminal.
  • the first aspect provides a configuration method for extended discontinuous reception, including:
  • the first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, the first information is used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
  • the target information includes at least one of the following:
  • the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the identification information of the first terminal is the identification information of the first terminal.
  • the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal is a part of the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
  • a configuration device for extended discontinuous reception including:
  • An acquisition module configured to acquire the first information of the first terminal, the first information being used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
  • the target information includes at least one of the following:
  • the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the identification information of the first terminal is the identification information of the first terminal.
  • the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal is a part of the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
  • the third aspect provides a configuration method for extended discontinuous reception, including:
  • the second communication device sends the first information of the first terminal, the first information is used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
  • the target information includes at least one of the following:
  • the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the identification information of the first terminal is the identification information of the first terminal.
  • the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal is a part of the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
  • a configuration device for extended discontinuous reception including:
  • a sending module configured to send the first information of the first terminal, the first information being used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
  • the target information includes at least one of the following:
  • the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the identification information of the first terminal is the identification information of the first terminal.
  • the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal is a part of the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
  • a first communication device in a fifth aspect, includes a processor and a memory.
  • the memory stores a program or instructions executable on the processor.
  • the program or instructions are processed by the processor.
  • the processor When the processor is executed, the steps of the method described in the first aspect are implemented.
  • a first communication device including a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface is used to obtain first information of the first terminal, and the first information is used for the first communication device Determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
  • the target information includes at least one of the following:
  • the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the identification information of the first terminal is the identification information of the first terminal.
  • the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal is a part of the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
  • a second communication device in a seventh aspect, includes a processor and a memory.
  • the memory stores programs or instructions executable on the processor. The programs or instructions are processed by the processor. When the processor is executed, the steps of the method as described in the third aspect are implemented.
  • a second communication device including a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface is used to send first information of the first terminal, and the first information is used by the first communication device to determine the The first terminal receives target information under multiple discontinuous DRX configurations;
  • the target information includes at least one of the following:
  • the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the identification information of the first terminal is the identification information of the first terminal.
  • the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal is a part of the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
  • a communication system including: a first communication device and a second communication device.
  • the first communication device can be configured to perform the steps of the configuration method for extended discontinuous reception as described in the first aspect, so The second communication device may be configured to perform the steps of the extended discontinuous reception configuration method described in the third aspect.
  • a readable storage medium is provided. Programs or instructions are stored on the readable storage medium. When the programs or instructions are executed by a processor, the steps of the method described in the first aspect are implemented, or the steps of the method are implemented as described in the first aspect. The steps of the method described in the third aspect.
  • a chip in an eleventh aspect, includes a processor and a communication interface.
  • the communication interface is coupled to the processor.
  • the processor is used to run programs or instructions to implement the method described in the first aspect. method, or implement a method as described in the third aspect.
  • a computer program/program product is provided, the computer program/program product is stored in a storage medium, and the computer program/program product is executed by at least one processor to implement as described in the first aspect
  • the first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, and the first communication device can determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple DRX configurations based on the first information to determine the first terminal.
  • the target DRX configuration or the terminal can be configured reasonably so that the SRS configuration matches the CN eDRX configuration information to ensure the power saving and positioning functions of the first terminal.
  • Figure 1 is a block diagram of a wireless communication system applicable to the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of the DRX cycle
  • Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of the paging time window
  • Figure 4 is a schematic flowchart of a configuration method for extended discontinuous reception on the first communication device side according to an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of the process of MT-LR according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of the process of MO-LR according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 7 is a schematic diagram of the SRS period within the PTW or outside the PTW according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 8 is a schematic flowchart of the configuration method for extended discontinuous reception on the second communication device side according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIGS 9a-9c are schematic diagrams of SRS transmission according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of triggering the first information according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a network side device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • first, second, etc. in the description and claims of this application are used to distinguish similar objects and are not used to describe a specific order or sequence. It is to be understood that the terms so used are interchangeable under appropriate circumstances so that the embodiments of the present application can be practiced in sequences other than those illustrated or described herein, and that "first" and “second” are distinguished objects It is usually one type, and the number of objects is not limited.
  • the first object can be one or multiple.
  • “and/or” in the description and claims indicates at least one of the connected objects, and the character “/" generally indicates that the related objects are in an "or” relationship.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • LTE-Advanced, LTE-A Long Term Evolution
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • TDMA Time Division Multiple Access
  • FDMA Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • OFDMA Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • SC-FDMA Single-carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • system and “network” in the embodiments of this application are often used interchangeably, and the described technology can be used not only for the above-mentioned systems and radio technologies, but also for other systems and radio technologies.
  • NR New Radio
  • the following description describes a New Radio (NR) system for example purposes, and uses NR terminology in much of the following description, but these techniques can also be applied to applications other than NR system applications, such as 6th Generation , 6G) communication system.
  • NR New Radio
  • FIG. 1 shows a block diagram of a wireless communication system to which embodiments of the present application are applicable.
  • the wireless communication system includes a terminal 11 and a network side device 12.
  • the terminal 11 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer (Tablet Personal Computer), a laptop computer (Laptop Computer), or a notebook computer, a personal digital assistant (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), a palmtop computer, a netbook, or a super mobile personal computer.
  • Tablet Personal Computer Tablet Personal Computer
  • laptop computer laptop computer
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • UMPC ultra-mobile personal computer
  • UMPC mobile Internet device
  • MID mobile Internet Device
  • AR augmented reality
  • VR virtual reality
  • robots wearable devices
  • WUE Vehicle User Equipment
  • PUE Pedestrian User Equipment
  • smart home home equipment with wireless communication functions, such as refrigerators, TVs, washing machines or furniture, etc.
  • game consoles personal computers (personal computer, PC), teller machine or self-service machine and other terminal-side devices.
  • Wearable devices include: smart watches, smart bracelets, smart headphones, smart glasses, smart jewelry (smart bracelets, smart bracelets, smart rings, smart necklaces, smart anklets) bracelets, smart anklets, etc.), smart wristbands, smart clothing, etc.
  • the network side device 12 may include an access network device or a core network device, where the access network device may also be called a radio access network device, a radio access network (Radio Access Network, RAN), a radio access network function or a wireless access network unit.
  • Access network equipment may include base stations, Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN) access points or WiFi nodes, etc.
  • the base stations may be called Node B, Evolved Node B (eNB), access point, base transceiver station ( Base Transceiver Station (BTS), radio base station, radio transceiver, basic Service set (Basic Service Set, BSS), extended service set (Extended Service Set, ESS), home B-node, home evolved B-node, transmitting receiving point (Transmitting Receiving Point, TRP) or any other suitable one in the field terminology, as long as the same technical effect is achieved, the base station is not limited to specific technical terms. It should be noted that in the embodiment of this application, only the base station in the NR system is used as an example for introduction, and the specific type of the base station is not limited.
  • Core network equipment may include but is not limited to at least one of the following: core network nodes, core network functions, mobility management entities (Mobility Management Entity, MME), access mobility management functions (Access and Mobility Management Function, AMF), session management functions (Session Management Function, SMF), User Plane Function (UPF), Policy Control Function (PCF), Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF), Edge Application Services Discovery function (Edge Application Server Discovery Function, EASDF), unified data management (Unified Data Management, UDM), unified data warehousing (Unified Data Repository, UDR), home subscriber server (Home Subscriber Server, HSS), centralized network configuration ( Centralized network configuration, CNC), Network Repository Function (NRF), Network Exposure Function (NEF), Local NEF (Local NEF, or L-NEF), Binding Support Function (Binding Support Function, BSF), Application Function (Application Function, AF), Location Server, Location Management Function (LMF), Evolved Serving Mobile Location Center (E-SMLC), etc. It
  • DRX means discontinuous reception.
  • the UE can save power.
  • the on duration is the DRX on interval. If there is no scheduling, the UE will enter the off period of a DRX cycle after the on duration.
  • the duration timer onDurationTimer
  • the discontinuous reception inactivity timer drx-InactivityTimer
  • the discontinuous reception forwarding timer drx-RetransmissionTimer
  • the starting offset of the long discontinuous reception cycle will be configured. (longDRX-CycleStartOffset) and other parameters.
  • the UE After the UE is configured with DRX, if the decoding of data sent or received fails, the UE needs to enter the activation time to monitor the control channel and wait for retransmission scheduled by the network.
  • the On Duration period if the UE is scheduled and receives data in a certain time slot, it is likely to continue to be scheduled in the next few slots. Therefore, whenever the UE is scheduled to initially transmit data, the timer drx-InactivityTimer is started or restarted, and the UE will remain in the active state until the timer times out.
  • the UE For downlink data reception, the UE will send data to the corresponding HARQ process after receiving the downlink data transmission indicated by the Physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) and feeding back the Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) information.
  • PDCCH Physical downlink control channel
  • HARQ Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request
  • HARQ RTT Red Trip Time
  • the UE For uplink data transmission, the UE will start the uplink return timer HARQ RTT Timer for the corresponding HARQ process after receiving the PDCCH to indicate uplink data transmission. After the HARQ RTT Timer times out, the UE starts the retransmission timer (drx-ULRetransmissionTimer) and enters the active state to listen to the PDCCH and wait for the transmission scheduled by the network.
  • drx-ULRetransmissionTimer retransmission timer
  • eDRX In idle mode, the maximum DRX cycle of traditional LTE is 2.56s, and frequent wake-ups consume UE power.
  • eDRX mode In order to reduce power consumption and extend standby time, eDRX mode is introduced.
  • eDRX is Extended idle-mode DRX cycle, extended discontinuous reception.
  • the terminal in this mode can receive downlink data only within the set paging time window (PTW).
  • PGW paging time window
  • the terminal is in a dormant state for the rest of the time and does not receive downlink data.
  • the IoT platform can cache messages or send messages immediately according to whether the device is in a dormant state. Later, the eDRX was also introduced into the inactive state.
  • H-SFN corresponds to 1024 system frame numbers (SFN), that is, one superframe is equal to 10.24s, and the maximum period of H-SFN is 1024 H-SFNs, corresponding to 2.9127hour.
  • PH paging Hyperframe, which is the superframe number where the paging message is located, the unit is H-SFN;
  • PTW paging Time Window, paging time window, SFN range within PH [PTW_start,PTW_stop];
  • PTW_start The starting position of PTW, unit SFN;
  • PTW_stop The end position of PTW, unit SFN.
  • the terminal when the terminal is in an idle state, the terminal cannot be positioned. If you want to support the positioning of idle state terminals, you need to solve the problem that when configuring the Core Network (CN) extended DRX cycle (eDRX), the idle state detection reference signal (Sounding Reference Signal, SRS) should How to configure or measure the idle positioning reference signal PRS.
  • CN Core Network
  • eDRX Extended DRX cycle
  • SRS Sounding Reference Signal
  • the power saving mechanism it is possible to introduce the extended DRX cycle (eDRX) of the core network in the inactive state in the future, or the extended DRX cycle (eDRX) of the RAN greater than 10.24s. .
  • eDRX extended DRX cycle
  • the network side device confirm the DRX where the terminal is located, and/or how to configure the detection reference signal or positioning reference signal PRS window under DRX.
  • the CN eDRX/DRX configuration information is sent to the terminal by the Access and Mobility Management Function (AMF) when the terminal registers; while the base station is paging ) message, but the current inactive SRS configuration information is carried by the base station in a Radio Resource Control (RRC) release message. That is to say, when the base station configures the SRS configuration information, it may not know the CN eDRX configuration information, causing the SRS configuration to fail to match the CN eDRX/DRX configuration information and affecting the power saving or positioning functions of the terminal.
  • AMF Access and Mobility Management Function
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the Location Management Function may recommend SRS configuration to the base station information, but LMF neither knows the configuration information of CN eDRX/DRX nor the configuration information of RAN eDRX/DRX, which may cause the recommended SRS configuration to fail to match the DRX configuration information.
  • timeout is considered invalid
  • problem (1) what needs to be solved is how the UE's CN eDRX configuration information interacts with the base station to which it belongs in a timely manner; for problem (2), what needs to be solved is the SRS configuration method within the TA or multi-cell area, so as to be applicable For UE in idle or inactive state, the eDRX state will not be frequently interrupted, affecting power saving.
  • This embodiment of the present application provides a configuration method for extended discontinuous reception, as shown in Figure 4, including:
  • Step 101 The first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, and the first information is used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
  • the target information includes at least one of the following:
  • the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the configuration information of at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs includes the period of the DRX, the length of the PTW, the starting position of the PTW, etc. Since the first communication device may not know the UE_ID_H and cannot calculate the starting position of the PTW, it may be necessary to Notify the first communication device of the specific starting position of the PTW;
  • the identification information of the first terminal such as Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier (C-RNTI), Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identifier (5G S-Temporary Mobile Subscription Identifier, 5G-STMSI), terminal identification It is expected to calculate the value UE_ID_H (13 bits), etc.; in this case, the first communication device can be notified of the identity of the first terminal, thereby calculating the starting position of the PTW, the paging position, etc.
  • C-RNTI Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier
  • 5G S-Temporary Mobile Subscription Identifier 5G-STMSI
  • terminal identification It is expected to calculate the value UE_ID_H (13 bits), etc.; in this case, the first communication device can be notified of the identity of the first terminal, thereby calculating the starting position of the PTW, the paging position, etc.
  • the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal is a part of the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
  • the first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, and the first communication device can determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple DRX configurations based on the first information to determine the first terminal.
  • the target DRX configuration or the terminal can be configured reasonably so that the SRS configuration matches the CN eDRX configuration information to ensure the power saving and positioning functions of the first terminal.
  • the first communication device may be a network side device such as a base station or a location management function (LMF),
  • the first communication device may obtain the first information from the second communication device, and the second communication device may be a terminal or an authentication management function (Authentication Management Function, AMF).
  • AMF Authentication Management Function
  • the first communication device is a location management function (LMF).
  • the optional first communication device can be further understood as an AMF.
  • the optional AMF obtains the first terminal or the base station from the first terminal.
  • Information, such as the base station is the DRX configuration information of the first terminal, or the first terminal reports the DRX configuration information obtained from the base station to the AMF, so that the AMF can provide the first information to the LMF, that is, the first information at least includes the DRX configuration information of the first terminal.
  • the first communication device is a location management function (LMF).
  • the optional first communication device can be further understood as a base station, and the first information can optionally be obtained from the first terminal or AMF. , if the AMF is the CN DRX configuration information of the first terminal, or the first terminal reports the CN DRX configuration information obtained from the AMF to the base station, so that the base station can provide the first information to the LMF, that is, the first information at least includes the above DRX configuration information of the first terminal.
  • the AMF is the CN DRX configuration information of the first terminal
  • the first terminal reports the CN DRX configuration information obtained from the AMF to the base station, so that the base station can provide the first information to the LMF, that is, the first information at least includes the above DRX configuration information of the first terminal.
  • the first communication device is a base station
  • the optional first communication device can be further understood as an LMF
  • the optional LMF obtains the first information from the first terminal or AMF, thereby based on the first A piece of information determines the target information and/or the first information to the base station, so that the base station can obtain the first information provided by the LMF and/or the target information recommended by the LMF.
  • the plurality of DRXs include at least two of the following:
  • Core network CN extends discontinuous reception eDRX
  • RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
  • the first communication device after the first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, it can determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple DRX configurations based on the first information. For example, the first terminal can determine the target information of the first terminal under RAN eDRX and CN. Under eDRX configuration, determine the configuration information of the target eDRX.
  • the target DRX configuration is a DRX configuration used by the first terminal, which may be one of multiple DRXs, or may be a target DRX configuration determined based on multiple DRXs.
  • the target DRX configuration is the DRX configuration used by the first terminal.
  • the target DRX of the first terminal is the configuration of the CN eDRX; if the cycle of the CN eDRX is greater than 10.24s, outside the PTW, the target DRX of the first terminal is determined based on the CN eDRX (for example, outside the PTW, the period is equal to the period of the CN eDRX); within the PTW, the target DRX of the first terminal needs to be combined with all Describing CN eDRX, The default paging cycle determines the on time of the target DRX.
  • the configuration information of multiple DRXs obtained by the first terminal is optionally the configuration information of CN eDRX and RAN eDRX.
  • the target DRX cycle determined by the first communication device is min ⁇ CN eDRX, RAN eDRX ⁇ , or the common divisor or common multiple of the two, or one of the two specified in accordance with the agreement, agreement or network, and if the CN eDRX, RAN eDRX both include PTW, the position of the PTW is The sum of two specified PTWs, or the two PTWs specified by the protocol, agreement or network, or the intersection of the two PTWs.
  • the CN eDRX and RAN eDRX are just an example of the configuration of multiple DRXs.
  • the optional ones can also be any combination of the following, and the target DRX can be multiple DRXs and DRXs configured by the first terminal. Agreement, convention, or network designation to finalize:
  • Core network CN extends discontinuous reception eDRX
  • RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
  • the first communication device may determine the configuration information of the reference signal (SRS) used for positioning by the first terminal under multiple DRX configurations.
  • the first terminal is in one DRX configuration among multiple DRX configurations, such as the configuration information of the reference signal (SRS) for positioning under RAN eDRX or CN eDRX >10.24s.
  • the first terminal is in multiple DRX configurations.
  • the first communication network determines the target DRX configuration information of the first terminal, and the target DRX configuration is used by the first terminal. DRX configuration, and then determine the configuration information of the reference signal (SRS) used for positioning under the target DRX.
  • the first communication device may determine the configuration information of the measurement window used by the first terminal to measure positioning reference signals under multiple DRX configurations.
  • the first terminal is configured in one DRX configuration among multiple DRX configurations, such as the configuration information of the measurement window for measuring positioning reference signals under RAN eDRX or CN eDRX >10.24s.
  • the first terminal is in multiple DRX configurations, first The first communication device determines the target DRX configuration information of the first terminal, the target DRX configuration is the DRX configuration used by the first terminal, and then determines the configuration information of the measurement window used to measure the positioning reference signal under the target DRX. .
  • the first communication device obtaining the first information of the first terminal includes:
  • the first communication device obtains the first information from the first terminal; or
  • the first communication device obtains the first information from the AMF.
  • the first communication device such as the base station, may obtain the first auxiliary information from the first terminal, or may obtain the first auxiliary information from the AMF.
  • the first communication device such as the LMF can obtain the first auxiliary information from the first terminal, or can also obtain the first auxiliary information from the AMF.
  • the first information obtained by the first communication device from the first terminal is included in the first auxiliary information reported by the first terminal.
  • the base station receives the first auxiliary information reported by the first terminal to help the base station determine power saving or positioning-related information of the first terminal.
  • the first auxiliary information is embedded in In a mobile-initiated location request (MO-LR request) or an event report, that is, when the first communication device is a base station, the first information is carried in a mobile-initiated location request (MO-LR request). ) or event report message.
  • the first assistance information is reported to the base station in a radio resource control (RRC) message, that is, when the first communication device is a base station, the first information is carried in the RRC message.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the first auxiliary information is reported to the LMF in a Long Term Evolution Positioning Protocol (LPP) message, that is, when the first communication device is an LMF, the first auxiliary information carries in LPP messages.
  • LPP Long Term Evolution Positioning Protocol
  • the first auxiliary information is carried in the small data transmission SDT.
  • the first auxiliary information is carried in a Non-access stratum (NAS) message and sent to the AMF.
  • NAS Non-access stratum
  • the first auxiliary information when the first terminal reports the first auxiliary information, the first auxiliary information also includes at least one of the following:
  • the radio resource control RRC state preferred by the first terminal and in the above state, the configuration information of the reference signal (SRS) used for positioning preferred by the first terminal, and/or used for measurement positioning preferred by the first terminal Configuration information of the measurement window of the reference signal;
  • SRS reference signal
  • the configuration information of the RAN eDRX that the first terminal prefers is greater than 10.24s, including the eDRX cycle, the length of the PTW, the starting position of the PTW, etc. Since the first communication device may not know the UE_ID_H, it cannot calculate the starting position of the PTW. , so it may be necessary to notify the first communication device of the specific starting position of the PTW;
  • the information of the configuration area of the target information preferred by the first terminal includes the area of RAN eDRX configuration, SRS configuration or PPW configuration.
  • the information of the configuration area includes at least one of the following: cell list (Cell list); Tracking area identification; registration Area; access network notification area (RNA) identifier; area identifier; current cell;
  • the information of the configuration area of the CN eDRX or CN DRX includes at least one of the following: Cell list (Cell list); Tracking area identification; registration area; RNA identification; area identification; current cell.
  • Cell list Cell list
  • Tracking area identification Registration area
  • RNA identification area identification
  • current cell current cell
  • the first auxiliary information includes the above information in addition to the first information.
  • the starting position H-SFN of the PTW can be calculated according to the following formula:
  • H-SFN modT eDRX_RAN (UE_ID_H mod T eDRX_RAN ), (Formula 1) or
  • H-SFN modT eDRX_CN (UE_ID_H modT eDRX_CN ), (Formula 2)
  • T eDRX_CN is the cycle of CN eDRX
  • T eDRX_RAN is the cycle of RAN eDRX.
  • T eDRX_RAN can be equal to T eDRX_CN , or it can take the minimum value of the configured RAN eDRX cycle and T eDRX_CN .
  • the starting position H-SFN of the PTW on the CN side is obtained according to Formula 2.
  • the expected eDRX cycle of the RAN side is that of the CN side.
  • the common denominator is that either the starting position of the PTW calculated on the RAN side includes the H-SFN on the CN side, or the starting position of the PTW calculated on the RAN side is the H-SFN on the CN side.
  • the starting position of the PTW may be different when it is idle or inactive.
  • the PTW position may be determined according to the protocol, convention or network side instruction.
  • the PTW starting position can be calculated based on the RAN eDRX cycle, for example, based on the RAN eDRX cycle and the RAN side UE ID (such as C-RNTI, fullI-RNTI, I-RNTI-Value, shortI-RNTI, ShortI- RNTI-Value) to calculate the PTW starting position;
  • the PTW starting position can be calculated based on the cycle of CN_eDRX, such as based on the cycle of CN eDRX and the CN side UE ID (such as UE_ID_H, 5G-STMSI).
  • the PTW starting position is calculated based on the cycle of RAN eDRX and the cycle of CN eDRX. For example, if the cycle of CN eDRX is greater than the eDRX cycle of RAN, the cycle of RAN eDRX is used. For example, the cycle calculated by using the common divisor of the two is used to confirm the position of the PTW. wait.
  • the PTW start positions in the idle state and inactive state are related.
  • the RAN eDRX cycle and the PTW start position can be calculated based on the CN eDRX cycle and UE ID.
  • the period of RAN eDRX and the starting position of PTW can be calculated based on the period of CN eDRX and the CN side UE ID.
  • the first communication device does not know the configuration of the PTW.
  • a terminal may report at least one of the starting position and length information of the PTW, or report CN eDRX and CN side UE ID information to the first communication device.
  • the first assistance information may include at least one of the following:
  • UE-specific eDRX such as CN eDRX, includes the cycle length of eDRX, the length of PTW, and the starting position of PTW, etc.;
  • the information of the configuration area that tends to the target information.
  • the information of the configuration area includes at least one of the following: cell list (Cell list); Tracking area identifier; Registration area; RNA identifier; Area identifier; Current cell.
  • the first communication device when the first communication device is a base station, the first communication device obtains the The first information obtained is carried in at least one of the following:
  • N2 suspend response message N2suspend response
  • the first information obtained by the first communication device from the AMF is carried in at least one of the following:
  • the first information further includes at least one of the following:
  • the first information may include at least one of the following:
  • the identification of the first terminal is the identification information of the CN side, the temporary mobile subscriber identity (5G-STMSI), the hash calculation value of the terminal identification UE_ID_H (13 bits), etc., optional , such as the Cell Radio Network Temporary Identity (C-RNTI) of the first terminal;
  • C-RNTI Cell Radio Network Temporary Identity
  • CN eDRX configuration information including eDRX cycle, PTW length, PTW starting position, etc.
  • the configuration area information includes at least one of the following: cell list (Cell list); Tracking area identification; RNA identification; area identification;
  • the configuration area information includes at least one of the following: cell list (Cell list); Tracking area identification; RNA identification; area identification.
  • the first information obtained by the first communication device from the AMF may be carried in the Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation message.
  • Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of the process of MT-LR in this embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 5, the first information can be carried in Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation in step 7;
  • Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of the process of MO-LR in this embodiment of the present application, as shown in Figure 6 As shown, the first information can be carried in Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation in step 4.
  • the first communication device is an LMF
  • the method further includes:
  • the first communication device recommends the first target information of the terminal to the base station, so that the base station determines the target information configured for the terminal in combination with the first target information.
  • the base station can reasonably configure the terminal, so that the SRS configuration matches the CN eDRX/CN DRX configuration information, ensuring the power saving and positioning functions of the first terminal.
  • this allows the base station to reasonably configure the terminal so that the SRS configuration matches the target DRX configuration information of the terminal, ensuring the power saving and positioning functions of the first terminal.
  • this allows the base station to reasonably configure the terminal. , so that the configuration of the SRS matches the configuration information of multiple DRXs configured for the terminal, ensuring the power saving and positioning functions of the first terminal.
  • the method before the first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, the method further includes:
  • the first communication device sends request information to the first terminal or AMF, instructing the first terminal or AMF to feed back the first information.
  • the first communication device needs to obtain the first information, it can instruct the first terminal or the AMF to feed back the first information by requesting information to help the first communication device determine the target information.
  • the first communication device is a base station, it can help the base station configure target information in the RRC release message.
  • the request information can be carried in at least one of the following:
  • N2 suspend request (N2suspend request);
  • N2 resume request (N2resume request).
  • the above request message is a request message for the base station to send AMF
  • the request message may be carried in an RRC message and used by the base station to request the terminal to send the first information.
  • the request message may carry LPP or its extended message, which is used by the LMF to request the terminal to send the first message.
  • the LMF may also send a request message to the AMF or the base station to request the first information
  • the method further includes:
  • the first communication device sends the target information to the first terminal.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first communication device sends response information to the first terminal or AMF, where the response information includes the target information, so that the first terminal can be configured through the response information.
  • the triggering event that triggers the first communication device to obtain the first information or determine the target information includes at least one of the following:
  • Positioning service request such as the Defered MT-LR process
  • the base station decides to switch from the RRC connection state to other states based on the positioning service request; for example, when the AMF forwards the positioning service request message, it carries the CN DRX of the first terminal, CN eDRX configuration information, at least one of the identification information of the first terminal is provided to the LMF;
  • the network side device prepares to configure the target information in the RRC release message, which can be triggered before the first terminal enters the inactive or idle state; in some embodiments, the network side prepares to switch to the inactive or idle state and sends a request message to the AMF. to obtain the first message, such as at least one of the first terminal's CN DRX, CN eDRX configuration information, and the first terminal's identification information.
  • the first terminal tends to enter eDRX and retain positioning services, which can be triggered before entering the inactive or idle state;
  • the AMF receives at least one of the delayed terminal terminated positioning request MT-LR, MT-LR and the terminal originated positioning request MO-LR;
  • AMF receives a location service request from a terminal located at CN eDRX or RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s;
  • the terminal receives indication information indicating low power
  • AMF receives a location service request that includes an indication of low power.
  • the following situations include:
  • AMF receives a location service request from the first terminal in the idle state or inactive state, such as receiving the LCS of MO-LR (for example, after a specific event is detected, such as location changes, such as area changes, the cycle is up, and the relevant request to AMF), or after receiving the "LCS MO-LR invoke" sent by the first terminal, the first terminal is already in the eDRX state, and the first terminal triggers the report based on the previous event trigger, or the UE determines that it can enter eDRX;
  • a location service request from the first terminal in the idle state or inactive state, such as receiving the LCS of MO-LR (for example, after a specific event is detected, such as location changes, such as area changes, the cycle is up, and the relevant request to AMF), or after receiving the "LCS MO-LR invoke" sent by the first terminal, the first terminal is already in the eDRX state, and the first terminal triggers the report based on the previous event trigger, or the UE determines that it can enter eDR
  • AMF receives the location request sent by the core network equipment (GMLS), and the first terminal is in the eDRX state, that is, the UE is in the eDRX state.
  • the MME mobility management entity
  • eDRX includes at least one of the following:
  • RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
  • step 14 is a trigger condition, which can trigger the location request in step 15 to include the first information.
  • the mobility management entity sends the location request, and in the NR system, the AMF may send the location request.
  • the configuration information of the eDRX includes at least one of the following:
  • the length of the paging time window PTW is the length of the paging time window PTW.
  • the eDRX includes at least one of the following:
  • RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
  • the above eDRX configuration information may include at least one of the following:
  • RAN eDRX cycle such that said RAN eDRX cycle is equal to or divisible by said CN eDRX;
  • the RAN eDRX PTW start position may overlap with the CN eDRX PTW, or be located in the CN eDRX PTW; or, the RAN eDRX PTW start position of the overlapping period, overlap with the CN eDRX PTW, or be located in the CN eDRX PTW, Or, the superframe numbers of the PTWs are the same.
  • the measurement window information includes at least one of the following:
  • Preconfigured identification of the measurement window in an optional embodiment, one or more measurement windows are included, and the preconfigured identification is used to identify the one or more measurement windows;
  • the time domain position of the measurement window can be used to determine the starting position of the measurement window; in an optional embodiment, the The superframe number of the measurement window can be obtained according to the superframe number of the PTW.
  • the superframe number of the measurement window, the frame number SFN, the slot position slot offset, etc. can be configured in the measurement window configuration information.
  • the position of the measurement window is relative to paging.
  • the time domain position of the measurement window also includes the end position of the measurement window.
  • the length of the measurement window in an optional embodiment, the length of the measurement window is N ms or M slots, or L frame length, optional N, M, L can be 1, 2 , at least one of 4, 6, 8, 10, 20, 40, etc. In an optional embodiment, the length of the measurement window can be configured in the measurement window configuration information;
  • the period of the measurement window in an optional embodiment, the length of the measurement window is N1 ms or M1 slots, or L1 frame length, optional N1, M1, L1 can be 10, 20 , at least one of 40, 60, 80, 128, 256, 512, etc.
  • the period of the measurement window can be configured in the measurement window configuration information.
  • the period of the measurement window is determined according to a protocol or convention, such as equal to the period of eDRX outside the PTW, and equal to the period of paging within the PTW.
  • the information of the measurement window is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
  • the measurement window is associated with the identification information of the terminal. For example, the time domain position of the measurement window is calculated based on the identification information of the first terminal. In an optional embodiment, the time domain position of the measurement window is calculated based on the first terminal.
  • the identification information of a terminal and/or the time domain offset indication information K1 are determined.
  • the period of the measurement window is related to the PTW; in an optional embodiment, the period of the measurement window is the period of the PTW. In another optional embodiment, the period of the measurement window is different within the PTW or outside the PTW. In yet another optional embodiment, the measurement window of a certain period is located outside the PTW, then the measurement window of the period is discarded and no measurement or processing of the positioning reference signal is performed.
  • the superframe of the measurement window is related to the superframe of the PTW.
  • the superframe of the measurement window is the same as the superframe of the PTW.
  • the starting slot of the measurement window is related to the paging opportunity PO and/or the paging frame PF.
  • the frame position is the same as the PF, but the intra-frame offset is different.
  • the PTW includes at least one of the following:
  • the terminal's final determined PTW position The terminal's final determined PTW position.
  • the measurement window when determining the measurement window PPW, can be determined by indicating the frame offset and the offset relative to the PF; when determining the time slot or symbol offset of the measurement window PPW, the measurement window can be determined by indicating the time slot offset. or symbol offset, which determines the starting point of the slot or symbol relative to a reference time domain position.
  • the reference time domain position is at least one of the slot where the PO is located, the first slot of the cycle, the specified slot, etc.
  • the measurement window is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, including at least one of the following:
  • the period of the measurement window is related to the period of the PTW or paging
  • the configuration information of the measurement window is default configuration information
  • the starting slot of the measurement window is related to the time domain position of paging
  • the positioning reference signal is not measured and/or processed over the period of the measurement window.
  • the period of the measurement window may be the minimum value among the first terminal-specific DRX cycle, the RAN paging cycle, and the default paging cycle, or it may be the cycle of the PTW or paging, and the measurement window is outside the PTW.
  • the period of the measurement window can be the period of RAN eDRX or the period of CNeDRX.
  • the starting slot of the measurement window is related to the time domain position of paging.
  • the starting slot of the measurement window avoids conflict with the time domain position of paging and is located several slots after the paging.
  • the configuration information of the measurement window includes first configuration information and second configuration information.
  • the first configuration information is used for measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals within the PTW.
  • the second configuration information For measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals outside the PTW.
  • the configuration information of the measurement window includes first configuration information, and the first configuration information is used for measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals within the PTW.
  • the measurement window is located outside the PTW, the The PTW is discarded, ie no measurement and/or processing of the positioning reference signal is performed during the period.
  • the PTW is discarded, that is, no measurement and/or processing of the positioning reference signal is performed during the period, or when the measurement window includes a portion located outside the PTW.
  • the measurement of the positioning reference signal is performed on the time domain position of the portion located within the PTW and/or or processing.
  • the measurement window when the measurement window is located within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
  • the measurement window does not overlap with the PO position
  • the measurement window is located behind the PO position
  • the measurement window includes the PO position
  • the measurement window includes the PO position
  • the measurement window includes the PO position, perform positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing;
  • the PTW includes at least one of the following:
  • the PTW position finally determined by the first terminal.
  • the above embodiment is used to indicate the behavior of the first terminal when the measurement window conflicts with the PO.
  • the measurement window when the measurement window is located within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
  • the measurement window does not overlap with the SSB position
  • the measurement window is located behind the SSB position
  • the measurement window includes the SSB position, discard the positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing that drops the measurement window;
  • the measurement window includes the SSB position
  • the SSB includes at least one of the following:
  • the first terminal is used to listen to the SSB of the MIB.
  • the method when the first communication device is a base station, the method further includes:
  • the first communication device interacts with the LMF or at least one neighboring cell at least one of the following:
  • the default DRX configuration information of the neighboring cell
  • the default paging configuration information of the neighboring cell is the default paging configuration information of the neighboring cell.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first communication device interacts with at least one of the following to the LMF or at least one neighboring cell:
  • the terminal can be reasonably configured according to the configuration information of neighboring cells to avoid resource conflicts.
  • the configuration information of the positioning reference signal of the terminal includes at least one of the following:
  • the sequence identifier of the SRS is related to 5G-S-TMSI, UE_ID_H (13-bit hashed ID); in an optional embodiment , including one or more SRS, the sequence identifier is used to identify the one or more SRS; optionally, the sequence identifier is used to identify the one or more SRS in a designated area; the designated The area can be a specified positioning area, within the cell list range, within the Tracking area range, the registration area, or the current cell
  • the length of the SRS is N2 ms or M2 slots, or L2 frame length.
  • N2, M2, and L2 can be 10, 20, 40, 60 , at least one of 80, 128, 256, 512, etc.
  • the SRS period can be configured to 20480, 40960ms.
  • the SRS period may be configured in SRS configuration information.
  • the period of the SRS is determined according to the protocol or agreement, such as equal to the period of eDRX outside the PTW, and equal to the period of paging within the PTW;
  • the time domain position of the SRS can be used to determine the starting position of the SRS; in an optional embodiment, the superframe number of the SRS It can be obtained according to the superframe number of the PTW.
  • the superframe number, frame number SFN, slot position, slot offset, etc. of the SRS can be configured in the SRS configuration information.
  • the position of the SRS is relative to paging. relative position.
  • the time domain position of the SRS also includes the termination position of the SRS.
  • the configuration information of the positioning reference signal may also include at least one of the following: SRS set ID, SRS resource ID, SRS symbol number, bandwidth part (BWP) ID, spatial relationship information, SRS transmit power parameter (such as P0 , alpha, path loss reference signal), Comb number, SRS time domain position, SRS frequency domain position, SRS muting indication information, SRS frequency hopping indication information.
  • the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
  • the positioning reference signal is associated with the identification information of the first terminal.
  • the position sent by the SRS is calculated based on the identification information of the first terminal.
  • the position sent by the SRS is calculated based on The identification information of the first terminal and/or the time domain offset indication information K3 are determined.
  • the period of the positioning reference signal is related to the period of the PTW.
  • the position sent by the SRS is relative to the starting position of the PTW; in an optional embodiment, the period of the SRS is the period of the PTW. In another optional embodiment, the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW. In yet another optional embodiment, if the SRS of a certain period is located outside the PTW, the SRS of the period is discarded, and the measurement or processing of the positioning reference signal is not performed.
  • the superframe of the positioning reference signal is related to the superframe of the PTW.
  • the superframe of the positioning reference signal is the same as the superframe of the PTW;
  • the starting slot of the positioning reference signal is related to the paging opportunity PO and/or the paging frame PF.
  • the frame position is the same as PF, but the intra-frame offset is different.
  • the intra-frame offset S0 is related to PO, or S0 is a constant, such as located S0 slots after PO; in another optional embodiment,
  • the PTW includes at least one of the following:
  • the terminal's final determined PTW position The terminal's final determined PTW position.
  • the positioning reference signal When determining the positioning reference signal, the positioning reference signal can be determined by indicating the frame offset and the offset relative to the PF; when determining the time slot or symbol offset of the positioning reference signal, the positioning reference signal can be determined by indicating the time slot offset. Shift or symbol offset to determine the starting point of the time slot or symbol relative to the reference time domain position.
  • the reference time domain position is at least one of the slot where the PO is located, the first slot of the cycle, the specified slot, etc.
  • the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, and/or, the time domain offset within the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW.
  • the period of the SRS is within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
  • the period of the SRS is the configured first period
  • the period of the SRS is related to the period of the PTW;
  • the cycle of the SRS is related to the first cycle and the cycle of paging
  • the SRS cycle is related to the paging cycle.
  • the SRS cycle can be the minimum value among the first terminal-specific DRX cycle, the RAN paging cycle and the default paging cycle; or, the SRS cycle can be the configured SRS cycle; or, the SRS cycle The cycle is the minimum value between the configured SRS cycle and the paging cycle; or the SRS cycle is 1/N of the paging cycle, for example, the paging cycle is 128ms, the SRS cycle is 1ms, 4ms, 8ms...64ms, etc., so that in There are multiple SRS cycles within a paging cycle or PTW.
  • Once part of the SRS is dropped (such as dropped by SSB or RO, etc.), there will also be SRS sent in other cycles, so there will be no transmission in the entire large eDRX cycle. The actual SRS is sent.
  • one association cycle may include multiple SRS cycles, and one paging cycle or PTW may include one or more association cycles.
  • the period of the SRS when the period of the SRS is outside the PTW, the period of the SRS satisfies at least one of the following:
  • the period of the SRS is K times the configured first period, and K is an integer;
  • the SRS cycle is the configured second cycle.
  • the SRS period T is the CN eDRX period, or may be the RAN eDRX period.
  • association relationship between the sequence identifier of the SRS and the identification information of the first terminal, and the association relationship satisfies at least one of the following:
  • the sequence identifier of the SRS is determined according to the hash calculation value Hashed ID of the first terminal. Further, the sequence group u used to generate the SRS is a function of the SRS sequence ID.
  • the SRS period T is the minimum value of the RAN paging period and the idle eDRX period.
  • the SRS period T is the minimum value of the inactive eDRX period and the idle eDRX period.
  • the SRS cycle T is the first terminal exclusive DRX cycle, RAN paging cycle and The minimum value in the default paging cycle; when the SRS cycle is outside the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the RAN paging cycle.
  • the SRS cycle T is the first terminal exclusive DRX cycle. , the minimum value of the inactive eDRX cycle and the default paging cycle; when the SRS cycle is outside the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the inactive eDRX cycle.
  • the SRS cycle T is the first terminal's exclusive DRX cycle, inactive The minimum value of the eDRX cycle and the default paging cycle; when the SRS cycle is outside the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the minimum value of the inactive eDRX cycle and the idle eDRX cycle, or the SRS cycle T is the inactive eDRX cycle.
  • the SRS cycle T is the idle eDRX cycle; when the idle eDRX cycle is greater than 10.24s and is located within the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the idle eDRX cycle.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a configuration method for extended discontinuous reception, as shown in Figure 8, including:
  • Step 201 The second communication device sends the first information of the first terminal, the first information is used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
  • the target information includes at least one of the following:
  • the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the identification information of the first terminal is the identification information of the first terminal.
  • the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal is a part of the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
  • the plurality of DRXs include at least two of the following:
  • Core network CN extends discontinuous reception eDRX
  • RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
  • the second communication device sending the first information of the first terminal includes:
  • the first terminal sends the first information
  • the authentication management function AMF sends the first information.
  • the first information sent by the first terminal is included in the first auxiliary information reported by the first terminal.
  • the first auxiliary information further includes at least one of the following:
  • the RAN eDRX configuration information preferred by the first terminal is greater than 10.24s;
  • the first information is carried in an RRC message
  • the first information is carried in a Long Term Evolution Positioning Protocol LPP message.
  • the first auxiliary information is carried in the small data transmission SDT.
  • the first information sent by the AMF is carried in at least one of the following: registration request; service request; handover request; N2 message; activation of N2 message Message; location paging reason; N2 hangup response message.
  • the first information sent by the AMF is carried in at least one of the following:
  • the first information further includes at least one of the following:
  • the information of the configuration area of the target information includes at least one of the following: cell list; Tracking area identifier; registration area; RNA identifier; area identifier; current cell.
  • the method before the second communication device sends the first information of the first terminal, the method further includes:
  • the second communication device receives the request information from the first communication device and instructs the second communication device to feed back the first information.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second communication device receives response information from the first communication device, where the response information includes the target information.
  • the configuration information of the eDRX includes at least one of the following: the period of eDRX; the length of the paging time window PTW; and the starting position of the PTW;
  • the eDRX includes at least one of the following: target eDRX; terminal-preferred target eDRX; CN eDRX; default eDRX; UE-specific eDRX; RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s; RAN eDRX less than 10.24s.
  • the information of the measurement window includes at least one of the following: a preconfigured identification of the measurement window; a time domain position of the measurement window; a length of the measurement window; and a period of the measurement window.
  • the configuration information of the measurement window is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs.
  • the configuration information of the measurement window is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
  • the measurement window is associated with the identification information of the terminal
  • the period of the measurement window is related to the period of the PTW
  • the superframe of the measurement window is related to the superframe of the PTW;
  • the starting slot of the measurement window is related to the paging opportunity PO and/or the paging frame PF;
  • the PTW includes at least one of the following:
  • the terminal's final determined PTW position The terminal's final determined PTW position.
  • the measurement window is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, including at least one of the following:
  • the period of the measurement window is related to the period of the PTW or paging
  • the configuration information of the measurement window is default configuration information
  • the starting slot of the measurement window is related to the time domain position of paging
  • the positioning reference signal is not measured and/or processed over the period of the measurement window.
  • the configuration information of the measurement window includes first configuration information and second configuration information.
  • the first configuration information is used for measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals within the PTW.
  • the second configuration information For measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals outside the PTW.
  • the measurement window when the measurement window is located within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
  • the measurement window does not overlap with the PO position
  • the measurement window is located behind the PO position
  • the measurement window includes the PO position
  • the measurement window includes the PO position
  • the measurement window includes the PO position, perform positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing;
  • the PTW includes at least one of the following:
  • the PTW position finally determined by the first terminal.
  • the configuration information of the positioning reference signal of the terminal includes at least one of the following: a sequence identifier of the SRS; a period of the SRS; and a time domain position of the SRS.
  • the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs.
  • the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
  • the positioning reference signal is associated with the identification information of the first terminal
  • the period of the positioning reference signal is related to the period of the PTW;
  • the superframe of the positioning reference signal is related to the superframe of the PTW;
  • the starting slot of the positioning reference signal is related to the paging opportunity PO/or the paging frame PF;
  • the PTW includes at least one of the following:
  • the terminal's final determined PTW position The terminal's final determined PTW position.
  • the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, and/or, the time domain offset within the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW.
  • the period of the SRS is within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
  • the period of the SRS is the configured first period
  • the period of the SRS is related to the period of the PTW;
  • the cycle of the SRS is related to the first cycle and the cycle of paging
  • the SRS cycle is related to the paging cycle.
  • the period of the SRS when the period of the SRS is outside the PTW, the period of the SRS satisfies at least one of the following:
  • the period of the SRS is K times the configured first period, and K is an integer;
  • the SRS cycle is the configured second cycle.
  • association relationship between the sequence identifier of the SRS and the identification information of the first terminal, and the association relationship satisfies at least one of the following:
  • the sequence identifier of the SRS is determined according to the hash calculation value Hashed ID of the first terminal.
  • the second communication device is a terminal
  • the sending slot or symbol of the SRS collides with other uplink data (collision includes overlapping with uplink data symbols and/or slots, or, with symbols of the uplink data In the case where the interval is less than Ngap symbols), the method also includes:
  • the SRS is transmitted and the uplink data is suspended;
  • the SRS is not transmitted and the uplink data is transmitted;
  • the SRS priority is lower than the second priority level, the SRS is not transmitted and the uplink data is transmitted.
  • the second communication device is a terminal
  • the sending slot or symbol of the SRS collides with other downlink data (collision includes overlapping with downlink data symbols and/or slots, or, with symbols of the downlink data In the case where the interval is less than Ngap symbols)
  • the method also includes:
  • the SRS is transmitted and the downlink data is suspended;
  • the SRS is not transmitted and the downlink data is transmitted;
  • the SRS priority is lower than the second priority level, the SRS is not transmitted and the downlink data is transmitted.
  • the first threshold, the second threshold, the first priority level, and the second priority level may be network side device configuration or preconfiguration or protocol definition.
  • the method further includes:
  • the SRS located outside the PTW can be dropped; in another embodiment, as shown in Figure 9b, the SRS is PO dropped, causing the SRS to be dropped; in yet another embodiment, as shown in Figure 9c indicates that before the end of PTW, if the SRS transmission for a predetermined number of cycles (such as one cycle) has not been completed (including the SRS cycle not being within the PTW, or part of the SRS being dropped resulting in the SRS not being actually sent), the SRS will be sent after the end of the PTW. Periodic sending can continue within time T until the SRS for the predetermined number of cycles is sent.
  • a predetermined number of cycles such as one cycle
  • the SRS period T is the minimum value of the RAN paging period and the idle eDRX period.
  • the SRS period T is the minimum value of the inactive eDRX period and the idle eDRX period.
  • the SRS cycle T is the first terminal exclusive DRX cycle, RAN paging cycle and The minimum value in the default paging cycle; when the SRS cycle is outside the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the RAN paging cycle.
  • the SRS cycle T is the first terminal exclusive DRX cycle. , the minimum value of the inactive eDRX cycle and the default paging cycle; when the SRS cycle is outside the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the inactive eDRX cycle.
  • the SRS cycle T is the first terminal's exclusive DRX cycle, inactive The minimum value of the eDRX cycle and the default paging cycle; when the SRS cycle is outside the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the minimum value of the inactive eDRX cycle and the idle eDRX cycle, or the SRS cycle T is the inactive eDRX cycle.
  • the SRS cycle T is the idle eDRX cycle; when the idle eDRX cycle is greater than 10.24s and is located within the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the idle eDRX cycle.
  • the execution subject may be an extended discontinuous reception configuration device.
  • the extended discontinuous reception configuration device performing the extended discontinuous reception configuration method is used as an example to illustrate the extended discontinuous reception configuration device provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides an extended discontinuous reception configuration device, applied to a first communication device, including:
  • An acquisition module configured to acquire the first information of the first terminal, the first information being used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
  • the target information includes at least one of the following:
  • the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the identification information of the first terminal is the identification information of the first terminal.
  • the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal is a part of the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
  • the first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, the first communication device can determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple DRX configurations based on the first information, and can reasonably configure the terminal. , so that the configuration of SRS matches the configuration information of CN eDRX, ensuring the power saving and positioning functions of the first terminal.
  • the plurality of DRXs include at least two of the following:
  • Core network CN extends discontinuous reception eDRX
  • RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
  • the acquisition module is used to acquire the first information from the first terminal; or
  • the first information is obtained from the authentication management function AMF.
  • the first information obtained by the first communication device from the first terminal is included in the first auxiliary information reported by the first terminal.
  • the first auxiliary information further includes at least one of the following:
  • the RAN eDRX configuration information preferred by the first terminal is greater than 10.24s;
  • the first information is carried in an RRC message
  • the first information is carried in the long-term evolution in the Positioning Protocol LPP message.
  • the first auxiliary information is carried in the small data transmission SDT.
  • the first information obtained by the first communication device from the AMF is carried in at least one of the following: a registration request; a service request; a handover request; N2 message; N2 message activation message; location paging reason; N2 hangup response message.
  • the first information obtained by the first communication device from the AMF is carried in at least one of the following:
  • the first information further includes at least one of the following:
  • the device further includes:
  • a recommendation module configured to recommend the first target information of the terminal to the base station, so that the base station determines the target information configured for the terminal in combination with the first target information.
  • the information of the configuration area of the target information includes at least one of the following: cell list; Tracking area identifier; registration area; RNA identifier; area identifier; current cell.
  • the device further includes:
  • a request information sending module is configured to send request information to the first terminal or AMF, instructing the first terminal or AMF to feed back the first information.
  • the device further includes:
  • a response information sending module configured to send response information to the first terminal or AMF, where the response information includes the target information.
  • the triggering event that triggers the first communication device to obtain the first information or determine the target information includes at least one of the following:
  • the network side device prepares to configure the target information in the RRC release message
  • Terminals tend to enter eDRX and retain positioning services
  • the AMF receives at least one of the delayed terminal terminated positioning request MT-LR, MT-LR and the terminal originated positioning request MO-LR;
  • AMF receives a location service request from a terminal located at CN eDRX or RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s;
  • the terminal receives indication information indicating low power
  • AMF receives a location service request that includes an indication of low power.
  • the configuration information of the eDRX includes at least the following: One item: the period of eDRX; the length of the paging time window PTW; the starting position of the PTW;
  • the eDRX includes at least one of the following: target eDRX; terminal-preferred target eDRX; CN eDRX; default eDRX; UE-specific eDRX; RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s; RAN eDRX less than 10.24s.
  • the information of the measurement window includes at least one of the following: a preconfigured identification of the measurement window; a time domain position of the measurement window; a length of the measurement window; and a period of the measurement window.
  • the configuration information of the measurement window is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs.
  • the configuration information of the measurement window is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
  • the measurement window is associated with the identification information of the terminal
  • the period of the measurement window is related to the period of the PTW
  • the superframe of the measurement window is related to the superframe of the PTW;
  • the starting slot of the measurement window is related to the paging opportunity PO and/or the paging frame PF;
  • the PTW includes at least one of the following:
  • the terminal's final determined PTW position The terminal's final determined PTW position.
  • the measurement window is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, including at least one of the following:
  • the period of the measurement window is related to the period of the PTW or paging
  • the configuration information of the measurement window is default configuration information
  • the starting slot of the measurement window is related to the time domain position of paging
  • the positioning reference signal is not measured and/or processed over the period of the measurement window.
  • the configuration information of the measurement window includes first configuration information and second configuration information.
  • the first configuration information is used for measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals within the PTW.
  • the second configuration information For measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals outside the PTW.
  • the measurement window when the measurement window is located within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
  • the measurement window does not overlap with the PO position
  • the measurement window is located behind the PO position
  • the measurement window includes the PO position
  • the measurement window includes the PO position
  • the measurement window includes the PO position, perform positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing;
  • the PTW includes at least one of the following:
  • the CN eDRX indicates the PTW location
  • the PTW position finally determined by the first terminal.
  • the apparatus when the first communication device is a base station, the apparatus further includes:
  • the interaction module is used to interact with at least one of the following with the LMF or at least one neighboring cell:
  • the default DRX configuration information of the neighboring cell
  • the default paging configuration information of the neighboring cell is the default paging configuration information of the neighboring cell.
  • the configuration information of the positioning reference signal of the terminal includes at least one of the following: a sequence identifier of the SRS; a period of the SRS; and a time domain position of the SRS.
  • the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs.
  • the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
  • the positioning reference signal is associated with the identification information of the first terminal
  • the period of the positioning reference signal is related to the period of the PTW;
  • the superframe of the positioning reference signal is related to the superframe of the PTW; the starting slot of the positioning reference signal is related to the paging opportunity PO and/or the paging frame PF;
  • the PTW includes at least one of the following:
  • the terminal's final determined PTW position The terminal's final determined PTW position.
  • the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, and/or, the time domain offset within the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW.
  • the period of the SRS is within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
  • the period of the SRS is the configured first period
  • the period of the SRS is related to the period of the PTW;
  • the cycle of the SRS is related to the first cycle and the cycle of paging
  • the SRS cycle is related to the paging cycle.
  • the period of the SRS when the period of the SRS is outside the PTW, the period of the SRS satisfies at least one of the following:
  • the period of the SRS is K times the configured first period, and K is an integer;
  • the SRS cycle is the configured second cycle.
  • the sequence identifier of the SRS is associated with the identification information of the first terminal, so The above-mentioned association relationship satisfies at least one of the following:
  • the sequence identifier of the SRS is determined according to the hash calculation value Hashed ID of the first terminal.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a configuration device for extended discontinuous reception, which is applied to the second communication device, including:
  • a sending module configured to send the first information of the first terminal, the first information being used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
  • the target information includes at least one of the following:
  • the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the identification information of the first terminal is the identification information of the first terminal.
  • the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal is a part of the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
  • the plurality of DRXs include at least two of the following:
  • Core network CN extends discontinuous reception eDRX
  • RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
  • the first terminal sends the first information
  • the authentication management function AMF sends the first information.
  • the first information sent by the first terminal is included in the first auxiliary information reported by the first terminal.
  • the first auxiliary information further includes at least one of the following:
  • the RAN eDRX configuration information preferred by the first terminal is greater than 10.24s;
  • the first information is carried in an RRC message
  • the first information is carried in a Long Term Evolution Positioning Protocol LPP message.
  • the first auxiliary information is carried in the small data transmission SDT.
  • the first information sent by the AMF is carried in at least one of the following:
  • the first information sent by the AMF is carried in at least one of the following:
  • the first information further includes at least one of the following:
  • the information in the configuration area of the target information includes at least one of the following:
  • the device further includes:
  • a receiving module configured to receive request information from the first communication device and instruct the second communication device to feed back the first information.
  • the device further includes:
  • a receiving module configured to receive response information from the first communication device, where the response information includes the target information.
  • the configuration information of the eDRX includes at least one of the following:
  • the length of the paging time window PTW is the length of the paging time window PTW.
  • the eDRX includes at least one of the following:
  • RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
  • the measurement window information includes at least one of the following:
  • the configuration information of the measurement window is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs.
  • the configuration information of the measurement window is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
  • the measurement window is associated with the identification information of the terminal
  • the period of the measurement window is related to the period of the PTW
  • the superframe of the measurement window is related to the superframe of the PTW;
  • the starting slot of the measurement window is related to the paging opportunity PO and/or the paging frame PF;
  • the PTW includes at least one of the following:
  • the terminal's final determined PTW position The terminal's final determined PTW position.
  • the measurement window is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, including at least one of the following:
  • the period of the measurement window is related to the period of the PTW or paging
  • the configuration information of the measurement window is default configuration information
  • the starting slot of the measurement window is related to the time domain position of paging
  • the positioning reference signal is not measured and/or processed over the period of the measurement window.
  • the configuration information of the measurement window includes first configuration information and second configuration information.
  • the first configuration information is used for measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals within the PTW.
  • the second configuration information For measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals outside the PTW.
  • the measurement window when the measurement window is located within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
  • the measurement window does not overlap with the PO position
  • the measurement window is located behind the PO position
  • the measurement window includes the PO position
  • the measurement window includes the PO position
  • the measurement window includes the PO position, perform positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing;
  • the PTW includes at least one of the following:
  • the PTW position finally determined by the first terminal.
  • the configuration information of the positioning reference signal of the terminal includes at least one of the following:
  • the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs.
  • the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
  • the positioning reference signal is associated with the identification information of the first terminal
  • the period of the positioning reference signal is related to the period of the PTW;
  • the superframe of the positioning reference signal is related to the superframe of the PTW;
  • the starting slot of the positioning reference signal is related to the paging opportunity PO/or the paging frame PF;
  • the PTW includes at least one of the following:
  • the terminal's final determined PTW position The terminal's final determined PTW position.
  • the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, and/or, the time domain offset within the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW.
  • the period of the SRS is within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
  • the period of the SRS is the configured first period
  • the period of the SRS is related to the period of the PTW;
  • the cycle of the SRS is related to the first cycle and the cycle of paging
  • the SRS cycle is related to the paging cycle.
  • the period of the SRS when the period of the SRS is outside the PTW, the period of the SRS satisfies at least one of the following:
  • the period of the SRS is K times the configured first period, and K is an integer;
  • the SRS cycle is the configured second cycle.
  • association relationship between the sequence identifier of the SRS and the identification information of the first terminal, and the association relationship satisfies at least one of the following:
  • the sequence identifier of the SRS is determined according to the hash calculation value Hashed ID of the first terminal.
  • the second communication device is a terminal, and in the case where the transmission slot or symbol of the SRS collides with other uplink and downlink data, the device further includes:
  • a processing module used to determine whether to transmit SRS based on the SRS cycle or SRS priority including any of the following:
  • the SRS is transmitted and the uplink and downlink data are suspended;
  • the SRS is not transmitted and the uplink and downlink data are transmitted;
  • the SRS priority is lower than the second priority level, the SRS is not transmitted and the uplink and downlink data are transmitted.
  • the device further includes:
  • a delay module configured to extend the PTW to complete the sending of the SRS for the predetermined number of cycles when the SRS for the predetermined number of cycles has not been sent within the PTW.
  • the extended discontinuous reception configuration device in the embodiment of the present application may be an electronic device, such as an electronic device with an operating system, or may be a component in the electronic device, such as an integrated circuit or chip.
  • the electronic device may be a terminal or other devices other than the terminal.
  • terminals may include but are not limited to the types of terminals 11 listed above, and other devices may be servers, network attached storage (Network Attached Storage, NAS), etc., which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of this application.
  • NAS Network Attached Storage
  • the extended discontinuous reception configuration device provided by the embodiments of the present application can implement each process implemented by the method embodiments of Figures 4 to 10, and achieve the same technical effect. To avoid duplication, the details will not be described here.
  • this embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device 600, which includes a processor 601 and a memory 602.
  • the memory 602 stores programs or instructions that can be run on the processor 601, for example.
  • the communication When the device 600 is a first communication device, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor 601, each step of the above extended discontinuous reception configuration method embodiment is implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved.
  • the communication device 600 is a second communication device, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor 601, each step of the above embodiment of the configuration method for extended discontinuous reception is implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved. To avoid duplication, the steps are not included here. Again.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a first communication device.
  • the first communication device includes a processor and a memory.
  • the memory stores programs or instructions that can be run on the processor.
  • the program or instructions are processed by the processor.
  • the steps of implementing the configuration method for extended discontinuous reception as described above are implemented.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a first communication device, including a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface is used to obtain first information of the first terminal, and the first information is used for the first communication
  • the device determines the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations
  • the target information includes at least one of the following:
  • the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the identification information of the first terminal is the identification information of the first terminal.
  • the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal is a part of the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a second communication device.
  • the second communication device includes a processor and a memory.
  • the memory stores programs or instructions that can be run on the processor.
  • the program or instructions are processed by the processor.
  • the steps of implementing the configuration method for extended discontinuous reception as described above are implemented.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a second communication device, including a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface is used to send first information of the first terminal, and the first information is used by the first communication device to determine The first terminal receives target information under multiple discontinuous DRX configurations;
  • the target information includes at least one of the following:
  • the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the identification information of the first terminal is the identification information of the first terminal.
  • the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal is a part of the time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
  • the above-mentioned first communication device may be a network side device or an LMF
  • the second communication device may be an AMF or a terminal.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a terminal that implements an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal 700 includes but is not limited to: a radio frequency unit 701, a network module 702, an audio output unit 703, an input unit 704, a sensor 705, a display unit 706, a user input unit 707, an interface unit 708, a memory 709, a processor 710, etc. At least some parts.
  • the terminal 700 may also include a power supply (such as a battery) that supplies power to various components.
  • the power supply may be logically connected to the processor 710 through a power management system, thereby managing charging, discharging, and power consumption through the power management system. Management and other functions.
  • the terminal structure shown in FIG. 11 does not constitute a limitation on the terminal.
  • the terminal may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or some components may be combined or arranged differently, which will not be described again here.
  • the input unit 704 may include a graphics processing unit (Graphics Processing Unit, GPU) 7041 and a microphone 7042.
  • the graphics processor 7041 is responsible for the image capture device (GPU) in the video capture mode or the image capture mode. Process the image data of still pictures or videos obtained by cameras (such as cameras).
  • the display unit 706 may include a display panel 7061, which may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display, an organic light emitting diode, or the like.
  • the user input unit 707 includes a touch panel 7071 and at least one of other input devices 7072 .
  • Touch panel 7071 also called touch screen.
  • the touch panel 7071 may include two parts: a touch detection device and a touch controller.
  • Other input devices 7072 may include but are not limited to physical keyboards, function keys (such as volume control keys, switch keys, etc.), trackballs, mice, and joysticks, which will not be described again here.
  • the radio frequency unit 701 after receiving downlink data from the network side device, can transmit it to the processor 710 for processing; in addition, the radio frequency unit 701 can send uplink data to the network side device.
  • the radio frequency unit 701 includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, amplifier, transceiver, coupler, low noise amplifier, duplexer, etc.
  • Memory 709 may be used to store software programs or instructions as well as various data.
  • the memory 709 may mainly include a first storage area for storing programs or instructions and a second storage area for storing data, wherein the first storage area may store an operating system, an application program or instructions required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, Image playback function, etc.) etc.
  • memory 709 may include volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or memory 709 may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically removable memory. Erase programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory can be random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), static random access memory (Static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (Dynamic RAM, DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (Synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (Double Data Rate SDRAM, DDRSDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (Synch link DRAM) , SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DRRAM).
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Double Data Rate SDRAM Double Data Rate SDRAM
  • DDRSDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Synch link DRAM synchronous link dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM direct memory bus
  • the processor 710 may include one or more processing units; optionally, the processor 710 integrates an application processor and modulation Demodulation processor, among which the application processor mainly processes operations involving the operating system, user interface and application programs, etc., and the modem processor mainly processes wireless communication signals, such as baseband processor. It can be understood that the above-mentioned modem processor may not be integrated into the processor 710.
  • embodiments of the present application further provide a network-side device, including a processor and a communication interface.
  • This network-side device embodiment corresponds to the above-mentioned network-side device method embodiment.
  • Each implementation process and implementation manner of the above-mentioned method embodiment can be applied to this network-side device embodiment, and can achieve the same technical effect.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a network side device.
  • the network side device 800 includes: an antenna 81 , a radio frequency device 82 , a baseband device 83 , a processor 84 and a memory 85 .
  • the antenna 81 is connected to the radio frequency device 82 .
  • the radio frequency device 82 receives information through the antenna 81 and sends the received information to the baseband device 83 for processing.
  • the baseband device 83 processes the information to be sent and sends it to the radio frequency device 82.
  • the radio frequency device 82 processes the received information and then sends it out through the antenna 81.
  • the method performed by the network side device in the above embodiment can be implemented in the baseband device 83, which includes a baseband processor.
  • the baseband device 83 may include, for example, at least one baseband board on which multiple chips are disposed, as shown in FIG. Program to perform the network device operations shown in the above method embodiments.
  • the network side device may also include a network interface 86, which is, for example, a common public radio interface (CPRI).
  • a network interface 86 which is, for example, a common public radio interface (CPRI).
  • CPRI common public radio interface
  • the network side device 800 in this embodiment of the present invention also includes: instructions or programs stored in the memory 85 and executable on the processor 84.
  • the processor 84 calls the instructions or programs in the memory 85 to perform the expansion as described above.
  • the configuration method of discontinuous reception can achieve the same technical effect. To avoid duplication, it will not be described in detail here.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a readable storage medium, with a program or instructions stored on the readable storage medium.
  • a program or instructions stored on the readable storage medium.
  • each process of the above extended discontinuous reception configuration method embodiment is implemented. And can achieve the same technical effect. To avoid repetition, they will not be described again here.
  • the processor is the processor in the terminal described in the above embodiment.
  • the readable storage medium includes computer readable storage media, such as computer read-only memory ROM, random access memory RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk, etc.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip.
  • the chip includes a processor and a communication interface.
  • the communication interface is coupled to the processor.
  • the processor is used to run programs or instructions to implement the above configuration of extended discontinuous reception.
  • Each process of the method embodiment can achieve the same technical effect, so to avoid repetition, it will not be described again here.
  • chips mentioned in the embodiments of this application may also be called system-on-chip, system-on-a-chip, system-on-chip or system-on-chip, etc.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program/program product.
  • the computer program/program product is stored in a storage medium.
  • the computer program/program product is executed by at least one processor to implement the above extended discontinuous reception.
  • Each process of the configuration method embodiment can achieve the same technical effect. To avoid duplication, it will not be repeated here. narrate.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, including: a first communication device and a second communication device.
  • the first communication device can be configured to perform the steps of the extended discontinuous reception configuration method as described above.
  • the third communication device The two communication devices may be configured to perform the steps of the extended discontinuous reception configuration method as described above.
  • the methods of the above embodiments can be implemented by means of software plus the necessary general hardware platform. Of course, it can also be implemented by hardware, but in many cases the former is better. implementation.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a computer software product that is essentially or contributes to the existing technology.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium (such as ROM/RAM, disk , CD), including several instructions to cause a terminal (which can be a mobile phone, computer, server, air conditioner, or network device, etc.) to execute the methods described in various embodiments of this application.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present application belongs to the technical field of communications. Disclosed are an extended discontinuous reception configuration method, an apparatus and a communication device. The extended discontinuous reception configuration method of the embodiments of the present application comprises: a first communication device acquires first information of a first terminal, wherein the first information is used for the first communication device to determine target information of the first terminal under configurations of a plurality of discontinuous receptions (DRXs); the target information comprises at least one of the followings: target DRX configuration information, information of a positioning reference signal (SRS), and information of a measurement window used for measuring and/or processing the positioning reference signal; and the first information comprises at least one of the followings: configuration information of at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs, identifier information of the first terminal, and time-frequency position or cycle information of a paging of the first terminal.

Description

扩展非连续接收的配置方法及装置、通信设备Extended discontinuous reception configuration method and device, communication equipment
相关申请的交叉引用Cross-references to related applications
本申请主张在2022年8月2日在中国提交的中国专利申请No.202210924098.4的优先权,其全部内容通过引用包含于此。This application claims priority from Chinese Patent Application No. 202210924098.4 filed in China on August 2, 2022, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本申请属于通信技术领域,具体涉及一种扩展非连续接收的配置方法及装置、通信设备。The present application belongs to the field of communication technology, and specifically relates to an extended discontinuous reception configuration method and device, and communication equipment.
背景技术Background technique
相关技术中,在终端处于空闲(idle)态时,无法对终端进行定位。如果要支持对idle态的终端进行定位,需要解决在配置核心网(Core Network,CN)扩展DRX周期(extended DRX cycle,eDRX)的情况下,idle态探测参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal,SRS)应该如何配置或者idle态定位参考信号PRS如何测量。In the related art, when the terminal is in an idle state, the terminal cannot be positioned. If you want to support the positioning of idle state terminals, you need to solve the problem that when configuring the Core Network (CN) extended DRX cycle (eDRX), the idle state detection reference signal (Sounding Reference Signal, SRS) should How to configure or measure the idle positioning reference signal PRS.
此外,考虑到省电机制,未来有可能在非激活(inactive)态时,引入核心网扩展DRX周期(extended DRX cycle,eDRX),或者大于10.24s的RAN扩展DRX周期(extended DRX cycle,eDRX)。这种情况下,网络侧设备如何确认终端所处的DRX,和/或如何在DRX下配置探测参考信号或者定位参考信号PRS窗口。In addition, taking into account the power saving mechanism, it is possible to introduce the extended DRX cycle (eDRX) of the core network in the inactive state in the future, or the extended DRX cycle (eDRX) of the RAN greater than 10.24s. . In this case, how does the network side device confirm the DRX where the terminal is located, and/or how to configure the detection reference signal or positioning reference signal PRS window under DRX.
基于现有流程,CN eDRX/DRX的配置信息是在终端注册的时候,接入和移动管理功能(Access and Mobility Management Function,AMF)发给终端的;而基站是在寻呼(paging)消息中得到的相关配置,但是目前非激活态(inactive)SRS的配置信息是基站在无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)释放(release)消息中携带的。也就是说基站在配置所述SRS的配置信息时,可能无法知道CN eDRX的配置信息,从而导致SRS的配置无法与CN eDRX/DRX的配置信息匹配,并影响终端的省电或者定位功能。此外,位置管理功能(Location Management Function,LMF)可能会向基站推荐SRS的配置信息,但是LMF既不知道CN eDRX/DRX的配置信息,也不知道RAN eDRX/DRX的配置信息,可能导致推荐的SRS配置无法与DRX的配置信息匹配。Based on the existing process, the configuration information of CN eDRX/DRX is sent to the terminal by the Access and Mobility Management Function (AMF) when the terminal registers; while the base station is in the paging message. The relevant configuration obtained, but the current inactive SRS configuration information is carried by the base station in the Radio Resource Control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) release message. That is to say, when the base station configures the SRS configuration information, it may not know the CN eDRX configuration information, resulting in the SRS configuration not matching the CN eDRX/DRX configuration information, and affecting the terminal's power saving or positioning functions. In addition, the Location Management Function (LMF) may recommend SRS configuration information to the base station, but LMF neither knows the configuration information of CN eDRX/DRX nor the configuration information of RAN eDRX/DRX, which may cause the recommended The SRS configuration cannot match the DRX configuration information.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种扩展非连续接收的配置方法及装置、通信设备,能够合理地对终端进行配置。Embodiments of the present application provide an extended discontinuous reception configuration method and device, and communication equipment, which can reasonably configure the terminal.
第一方面,提供了一种扩展非连续接收的配置方法,包括: The first aspect provides a configuration method for extended discontinuous reception, including:
第一通信设备获取第一终端的第一信息,所述第一信息用于所述第一通信设备确定所述第一终端在多个非连续接收DRX配置下的目标信息;The first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, the first information is used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:The target information includes at least one of the following:
目标DRX配置信息;Target DRX configuration information;
定位参考信号SRS的信息;Positioning reference signal SRS information;
用于测量和/或处理定位参考信号的测量窗的信息;Information on the measurement window used to measure and/or process the positioning reference signal;
其中第一信息包括以下至少一项:The first information includes at least one of the following:
所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX的配置信息;Configuration information of at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
所述第一终端的标识信息;The identification information of the first terminal;
所述第一终端的寻呼paging的时频位置或周期信息。The time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
第二方面,提供了一种扩展非连续接收的配置装置,包括:In the second aspect, a configuration device for extended discontinuous reception is provided, including:
获取模块,用于获取第一终端的第一信息,所述第一信息用于所述第一通信设备确定所述第一终端在多个非连续接收DRX配置下的目标信息;An acquisition module, configured to acquire the first information of the first terminal, the first information being used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:The target information includes at least one of the following:
目标DRX配置信息;Target DRX configuration information;
定位参考信号SRS的信息;Positioning reference signal SRS information;
用于测量和/或处理定位参考信号的测量窗的信息;Information on the measurement window used to measure and/or process the positioning reference signal;
其中第一信息包括以下至少一项:The first information includes at least one of the following:
所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX的配置信息;Configuration information of at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
所述第一终端的标识信息;The identification information of the first terminal;
所述第一终端的寻呼paging的时频位置或周期信息。The time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
第三方面,提供了一种扩展非连续接收的配置方法,包括:The third aspect provides a configuration method for extended discontinuous reception, including:
第二通信设备发送第一终端的第一信息,所述第一信息用于第一通信设备确定所述第一终端在多个非连续接收DRX配置下的目标信息;The second communication device sends the first information of the first terminal, the first information is used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:The target information includes at least one of the following:
目标DRX配置信息;Target DRX configuration information;
定位参考信号SRS的信息;Positioning reference signal SRS information;
用于测量和/或处理定位参考信号的测量窗的信息;Information on the measurement window used to measure and/or process the positioning reference signal;
其中第一信息包括以下至少一项:The first information includes at least one of the following:
所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX的配置信息;Configuration information of at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
所述第一终端的标识信息;The identification information of the first terminal;
所述第一终端的寻呼paging的时频位置或周期信息。The time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
第四方面,提供了一种扩展非连续接收的配置装置,包括:In the fourth aspect, a configuration device for extended discontinuous reception is provided, including:
发送模块,用于发送第一终端的第一信息,所述第一信息用于第一通信设备确定所述第一终端在多个非连续接收DRX配置下的目标信息; A sending module, configured to send the first information of the first terminal, the first information being used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:The target information includes at least one of the following:
目标DRX配置信息;Target DRX configuration information;
定位参考信号SRS的信息;Positioning reference signal SRS information;
用于测量和/或处理定位参考信号的测量窗的信息;Information on the measurement window used to measure and/or process the positioning reference signal;
其中第一信息包括以下至少一项:The first information includes at least one of the following:
所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX的配置信息;Configuration information of at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
所述第一终端的标识信息;The identification information of the first terminal;
所述第一终端的寻呼paging的时频位置或周期信息。The time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
第五方面,提供了一种第一通信设备,该第一通信设备包括处理器和存储器,所述存储器存储可在所述处理器上运行的程序或指令,所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现如第一方面所述的方法的步骤。In a fifth aspect, a first communication device is provided. The first communication device includes a processor and a memory. The memory stores a program or instructions executable on the processor. The program or instructions are processed by the processor. When the processor is executed, the steps of the method described in the first aspect are implemented.
第六方面,提供了一种第一通信设备,包括处理器及通信接口,其中,所述通信接口用于获取第一终端的第一信息,所述第一信息用于所述第一通信设备确定所述第一终端在多个非连续接收DRX配置下的目标信息;In a sixth aspect, a first communication device is provided, including a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface is used to obtain first information of the first terminal, and the first information is used for the first communication device Determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:The target information includes at least one of the following:
目标DRX配置信息;Target DRX configuration information;
定位参考信号SRS的信息;Positioning reference signal SRS information;
用于测量和/或处理定位参考信号的测量窗的信息;Information on the measurement window used to measure and/or process the positioning reference signal;
其中第一信息包括以下至少一项:The first information includes at least one of the following:
所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX的配置信息;Configuration information of at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
所述第一终端的标识信息;The identification information of the first terminal;
所述第一终端的寻呼paging的时频位置或周期信息。The time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
第七方面,提供了一种第二通信设备,该第二通信设备包括处理器和存储器,所述存储器存储可在所述处理器上运行的程序或指令,所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现如第三方面所述的方法的步骤。In a seventh aspect, a second communication device is provided. The second communication device includes a processor and a memory. The memory stores programs or instructions executable on the processor. The programs or instructions are processed by the processor. When the processor is executed, the steps of the method as described in the third aspect are implemented.
第八方面,提供了一种第二通信设备,包括处理器及通信接口,其中,所述通信接口用于发送第一终端的第一信息,所述第一信息用于第一通信设备确定所述第一终端在多个非连续接收DRX配置下的目标信息;In an eighth aspect, a second communication device is provided, including a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface is used to send first information of the first terminal, and the first information is used by the first communication device to determine the The first terminal receives target information under multiple discontinuous DRX configurations;
所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:The target information includes at least one of the following:
目标DRX配置信息;Target DRX configuration information;
定位参考信号SRS的信息;Positioning reference signal SRS information;
用于测量和/或处理定位参考信号的测量窗的信息;Information on the measurement window used to measure and/or process the positioning reference signal;
其中第一信息包括以下至少一项:The first information includes at least one of the following:
所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX的配置信息;Configuration information of at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
所述第一终端的标识信息; The identification information of the first terminal;
所述第一终端的寻呼paging的时频位置或周期信息。The time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
第九方面,提供了一种通信系统,包括:第一通信设备及第二通信设备,所述第一通信设备可用于执行如第一方面所述的扩展非连续接收的配置方法的步骤,所述第二通信设备可用于执行如第三方面所述的扩展非连续接收的配置方法的步骤。In a ninth aspect, a communication system is provided, including: a first communication device and a second communication device. The first communication device can be configured to perform the steps of the configuration method for extended discontinuous reception as described in the first aspect, so The second communication device may be configured to perform the steps of the extended discontinuous reception configuration method described in the third aspect.
第十方面,提供了一种可读存储介质,所述可读存储介质上存储程序或指令,所述程序或指令被处理器执行时实现如第一方面所述的方法的步骤,或者实现如第三方面所述的方法的步骤。In a tenth aspect, a readable storage medium is provided. Programs or instructions are stored on the readable storage medium. When the programs or instructions are executed by a processor, the steps of the method described in the first aspect are implemented, or the steps of the method are implemented as described in the first aspect. The steps of the method described in the third aspect.
第十一方面,提供了一种芯片,所述芯片包括处理器和通信接口,所述通信接口和所述处理器耦合,所述处理器用于运行程序或指令,实现如第一方面所述的方法,或实现如第三方面所述的方法。In an eleventh aspect, a chip is provided. The chip includes a processor and a communication interface. The communication interface is coupled to the processor. The processor is used to run programs or instructions to implement the method described in the first aspect. method, or implement a method as described in the third aspect.
第十二方面,提供了一种计算机程序/程序产品,所述计算机程序/程序产品被存储在存储介质中,所述计算机程序/程序产品被至少一个处理器执行以实现如第一方面所述的扩展非连续接收的配置方法,或实现如第三方面所述的扩展非连续接收的配置方法的步骤。In a twelfth aspect, a computer program/program product is provided, the computer program/program product is stored in a storage medium, and the computer program/program product is executed by at least one processor to implement as described in the first aspect The configuration method of extended discontinuous reception, or the steps of implementing the configuration method of extended discontinuous reception as described in the third aspect.
在本申请实施例中,第一通信设备获取第一终端的第一信息,第一通信设备能够根据第一信息确定第一终端在多个DRX配置下的目标信息,以确定所述第一终端的目标DRX配置或者能够合理地对终端进行配置,使得SRS的配置与CN eDRX的配置信息匹配,保证第一终端的省电以及定位功能。In this embodiment of the present application, the first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, and the first communication device can determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple DRX configurations based on the first information to determine the first terminal. The target DRX configuration or the terminal can be configured reasonably so that the SRS configuration matches the CN eDRX configuration information to ensure the power saving and positioning functions of the first terminal.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1是本申请实施例可应用的一种无线通信系统的框图;Figure 1 is a block diagram of a wireless communication system applicable to the embodiment of the present application;
图2是DRX周期示意图;Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of the DRX cycle;
图3是寻呼时间窗口示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of the paging time window;
图4是本申请实施例第一通信设备侧扩展非连续接收的配置方法的流程示意图;Figure 4 is a schematic flowchart of a configuration method for extended discontinuous reception on the first communication device side according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请实施例MT-LR的过程示意图;Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of the process of MT-LR according to the embodiment of the present application;
图6是本申请实施例MO-LR的过程示意图;Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of the process of MO-LR according to the embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请实施例SRS的周期在PTW内或PTW外的示意图;Figure 7 is a schematic diagram of the SRS period within the PTW or outside the PTW according to the embodiment of the present application;
图8是本申请实施例第二通信设备侧扩展非连续接收的配置方法的流程示意图;Figure 8 is a schematic flowchart of the configuration method for extended discontinuous reception on the second communication device side according to the embodiment of the present application;
图9a-图9c是本申请实施例传输SRS的示意图;Figures 9a-9c are schematic diagrams of SRS transmission according to an embodiment of the present application;
图10是本申请实施例触发第一信息的示意图;Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of triggering the first information according to an embodiment of the present application;
图11是本申请实施例通信设备的结构示意图;Figure 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图12是本申请实施例终端的结构示意图;Figure 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present application;
图13是本申请实施例网络侧设备的结构示意图。Figure 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a network side device according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式 Detailed ways
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚描述,显然,所描述的实施例是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本申请保护的范围。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be clearly described below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application. Obviously, the described embodiments are part of the embodiments of the present application, but not all of the embodiments. Based on the embodiments in this application, all other embodiments obtained by those of ordinary skill in the art fall within the scope of protection of this application.
本申请的说明书和权利要求书中的术语“第一”、“第二”等是用于区别类似的对象,而不用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。应该理解这样使用的术语在适当情况下可以互换,以便本申请的实施例能够以除了在这里图示或描述的那些以外的顺序实施,且“第一”、“第二”所区别的对象通常为一类,并不限定对象的个数,例如第一对象可以是一个,也可以是多个。此外,说明书以及权利要求中“和/或”表示所连接对象的至少其中之一,字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。The terms "first", "second", etc. in the description and claims of this application are used to distinguish similar objects and are not used to describe a specific order or sequence. It is to be understood that the terms so used are interchangeable under appropriate circumstances so that the embodiments of the present application can be practiced in sequences other than those illustrated or described herein, and that "first" and "second" are distinguished objects It is usually one type, and the number of objects is not limited. For example, the first object can be one or multiple. In addition, "and/or" in the description and claims indicates at least one of the connected objects, and the character "/" generally indicates that the related objects are in an "or" relationship.
值得指出的是,本申请实施例所描述的技术不限于长期演进型(Long Term Evolution,LTE)/LTE的演进(LTE-Advanced,LTE-A)系统,还可用于其他无线通信系统,诸如码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,CDMA)、时分多址(Time Division Multiple Access,TDMA)、频分多址(Frequency Division Multiple Access,FDMA)、正交频分多址(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access,OFDMA)、单载波频分多址(Single-carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access,SC-FDMA)和其他系统。本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”常被可互换地使用,所描述的技术既可用于以上提及的系统和无线电技术,也可用于其他系统和无线电技术。以下描述出于示例目的描述了新空口(New Radio,NR)系统,并且在以下大部分描述中使用NR术语,但是这些技术也可应用于NR系统应用以外的应用,如第6代(6th Generation,6G)通信系统。It is worth pointing out that the technology described in the embodiments of this application is not limited to Long Term Evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE)/LTE Evolution (LTE-Advanced, LTE-A) systems, and can also be used in other wireless communication systems, such as code Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), Time Division Multiple Access (Time Division Multiple Access, TDMA), Frequency Division Multiple Access (Frequency Division Multiple Access, FDMA), Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access, OFDMA), Single-carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) and other systems. The terms "system" and "network" in the embodiments of this application are often used interchangeably, and the described technology can be used not only for the above-mentioned systems and radio technologies, but also for other systems and radio technologies. The following description describes a New Radio (NR) system for example purposes, and uses NR terminology in much of the following description, but these techniques can also be applied to applications other than NR system applications, such as 6th Generation , 6G) communication system.
图1示出本申请实施例可应用的一种无线通信系统的框图。无线通信系统包括终端11和网络侧设备12。其中,终端11可以是手机、平板电脑(Tablet Personal Computer)、膝上型电脑(Laptop Computer)或称为笔记本电脑、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)、掌上电脑、上网本、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer,UMPC)、移动上网装置(Mobile Internet Device,MID)、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)/虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、机器人、可穿戴式设备(Wearable Device)、车载设备(Vehicle User Equipment,VUE)、行人终端(Pedestrian User Equipment,PUE)、智能家居(具有无线通信功能的家居设备,如冰箱、电视、洗衣机或者家具等)、游戏机、个人计算机(personal computer,PC)、柜员机或者自助机等终端侧设备,可穿戴式设备包括:智能手表、智能手环、智能耳机、智能眼镜、智能首饰(智能手镯、智能手链、智能戒指、智能项链、智能脚镯、智能脚链等)、智能腕带、智能服装等。需要说明的是,在本申请实施例并不限定终端11的具体类型。网络侧设备12可以包括接入网设备或核心网设备,其中,接入网设备也可以称为无线接入网设备、无线接入网(Radio Access Network,RAN)、无线接入网功能或无线接入网单元。接入网设备可以包括基站、无线局域网(Wireless Local Area Networks,WLAN)接入点或WiFi节点等,基站可被称为节点B、演进节点B(eNB)、接入点、基收发机站(Base Transceiver Station,BTS)、无线电基站、无线电收发机、基本 服务集(Basic Service Set,BSS)、扩展服务集(Extended Service Set,ESS)、家用B节点、家用演进型B节点、发送接收点(Transmitting Receiving Point,TRP)或所述领域中其他某个合适的术语,只要达到相同的技术效果,所述基站不限于特定技术词汇,需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中仅以NR系统中的基站为例进行介绍,并不限定基站的具体类型。Figure 1 shows a block diagram of a wireless communication system to which embodiments of the present application are applicable. The wireless communication system includes a terminal 11 and a network side device 12. The terminal 11 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer (Tablet Personal Computer), a laptop computer (Laptop Computer), or a notebook computer, a personal digital assistant (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), a palmtop computer, a netbook, or a super mobile personal computer. (ultra-mobile personal computer, UMPC), mobile Internet device (Mobile Internet Device, MID), augmented reality (AR)/virtual reality (VR) equipment, robots, wearable devices (Wearable Device) , Vehicle User Equipment (VUE), Pedestrian User Equipment (PUE), smart home (home equipment with wireless communication functions, such as refrigerators, TVs, washing machines or furniture, etc.), game consoles, personal computers (personal computer, PC), teller machine or self-service machine and other terminal-side devices. Wearable devices include: smart watches, smart bracelets, smart headphones, smart glasses, smart jewelry (smart bracelets, smart bracelets, smart rings, smart necklaces, smart anklets) bracelets, smart anklets, etc.), smart wristbands, smart clothing, etc. It should be noted that the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific type of the terminal 11. The network side device 12 may include an access network device or a core network device, where the access network device may also be called a radio access network device, a radio access network (Radio Access Network, RAN), a radio access network function or a wireless access network unit. Access network equipment may include base stations, Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN) access points or WiFi nodes, etc. The base stations may be called Node B, Evolved Node B (eNB), access point, base transceiver station ( Base Transceiver Station (BTS), radio base station, radio transceiver, basic Service set (Basic Service Set, BSS), extended service set (Extended Service Set, ESS), home B-node, home evolved B-node, transmitting receiving point (Transmitting Receiving Point, TRP) or any other suitable one in the field terminology, as long as the same technical effect is achieved, the base station is not limited to specific technical terms. It should be noted that in the embodiment of this application, only the base station in the NR system is used as an example for introduction, and the specific type of the base station is not limited.
核心网设备可以包含但不限于如下至少一项:核心网节点、核心网功能、移动管理实体(Mobility Management Entity,MME)、接入移动管理功能(Access and Mobility Management Function,AMF)、会话管理功能(Session Management Function,SMF)、用户平面功能(User Plane Function,UPF)、策略控制功能(Policy Control Function,PCF)、策略与计费规则功能单元(Policy and Charging Rules Function,PCRF)、边缘应用服务发现功能(Edge Application Server Discovery Function,EASDF)、统一数据管理(Unified Data Management,UDM),统一数据仓储(Unified Data Repository,UDR)、归属用户服务器(Home Subscriber Server,HSS)、集中式网络配置(Centralized network configuration,CNC)、网络存储功能(Network Repository Function,NRF),网络开放功能(Network Exposure Function,NEF)、本地NEF(Local NEF,或L-NEF)、绑定支持功能(Binding Support Function,BSF)、应用功能(Application Function,AF)、位置服务器、位置管理功能(Location Management Function,LMF),基于演进的服务移动位置中心(Evolved Serving Mobile Location Center,E-SMLC),等。需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中仅以NR系统中的核心网设备为例进行介绍,并不限定核心网设备的具体类型。Core network equipment may include but is not limited to at least one of the following: core network nodes, core network functions, mobility management entities (Mobility Management Entity, MME), access mobility management functions (Access and Mobility Management Function, AMF), session management functions (Session Management Function, SMF), User Plane Function (UPF), Policy Control Function (PCF), Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF), Edge Application Services Discovery function (Edge Application Server Discovery Function, EASDF), unified data management (Unified Data Management, UDM), unified data warehousing (Unified Data Repository, UDR), home subscriber server (Home Subscriber Server, HSS), centralized network configuration ( Centralized network configuration, CNC), Network Repository Function (NRF), Network Exposure Function (NEF), Local NEF (Local NEF, or L-NEF), Binding Support Function (Binding Support Function, BSF), Application Function (Application Function, AF), Location Server, Location Management Function (LMF), Evolved Serving Mobile Location Center (E-SMLC), etc. It should be noted that in the embodiment of this application, only the core network equipment in the NR system is used as an example for introduction, and the specific type of the core network equipment is not limited.
LTE和NR都引入了DRX机制,DRX是非连续接收的意思,通过配置DRX开启(on)和关闭(off)时间来达到UE的省电。如图2所示,在on duration期间是DRX on的区间,如果没有调度,在on duration期间过后UE就会进入一个DRX周期(cycle)的off期间。Both LTE and NR have introduced the DRX mechanism. DRX means discontinuous reception. By configuring the DRX on (on) and off (off) time, the UE can save power. As shown in Figure 2, the on duration is the DRX on interval. If there is no scheduling, the UE will enter the off period of a DRX cycle after the on duration.
配置DRX的时候会配置持续时间定时器(onDurationTimer),非连续接收非激活态定时器(drx-InactivityTimer),非连续接收转发定时器(drx-RetransmissionTimer),长非连续接收周期起始偏移量(longDRX-CycleStartOffset)等参数。When configuring DRX, the duration timer (onDurationTimer), the discontinuous reception inactivity timer (drx-InactivityTimer), the discontinuous reception forwarding timer (drx-RetransmissionTimer), and the starting offset of the long discontinuous reception cycle will be configured. (longDRX-CycleStartOffset) and other parameters.
UE在配置了DRX后,如果发送或接收数据解码失败,UE需要进入激活时间监听控制信道,等待网络调度的重传。After the UE is configured with DRX, if the decoding of data sent or received fails, the UE needs to enter the activation time to monitor the control channel and wait for retransmission scheduled by the network.
在On Duration期间,若UE在某个时隙(slot)被调度并接收数据后,很可能在接下来的几个slot内继续被调度。因此,每当UE被调度初传数据后就启动或重启定时器drx-InactivityTimer,UE将一直位于激活态直到该定时器超时。During the On Duration period, if the UE is scheduled and receives data in a certain time slot, it is likely to continue to be scheduled in the next few slots. Therefore, whenever the UE is scheduled to initially transmit data, the timer drx-InactivityTimer is started or restarted, and the UE will remain in the active state until the timer times out.
对于下行数据接收,UE会在接收到物理下行控制信息(Physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)指示的下行数据传输并反馈混合自动重传请求(Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request,HARQ)信息后,给对应的HARQ进程启动下行回传定时器(HARQ RTT(Round Trip Time)Timer)。如果在HARQ RTT Timer超时后,且该HARQ进程的数据没有成功解码,则UE启动重传定时器(drx-RetransmissionTimer),并监听PDCCH,等待传输。 For downlink data reception, the UE will send data to the corresponding HARQ process after receiving the downlink data transmission indicated by the Physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) and feeding back the Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) information. Start the downlink return timer (HARQ RTT (Round Trip Time) Timer). If the HARQ RTT Timer times out and the data of the HARQ process is not successfully decoded, the UE starts the retransmission timer (drx-RetransmissionTimer) and listens to the PDCCH, waiting for transmission.
对于上行数据发送,UE会在接收到PDCCH指示上行数据传输后,给对应的HARQ进程启动上行回传定时器HARQ RTT Timer。在HARQ RTT Timer超时后,则UE启动重传定时器(drx-ULRetransmissionTimer),并进入激活状态监听PDCCH,等待网络调度的传输。For uplink data transmission, the UE will start the uplink return timer HARQ RTT Timer for the corresponding HARQ process after receiving the PDCCH to indicate uplink data transmission. After the HARQ RTT Timer times out, the UE starts the retransmission timer (drx-ULRetransmissionTimer) and enters the active state to listen to the PDCCH and wait for the transmission scheduled by the network.
在idle下,传统LTE的DRX周期最大值为2.56s,频繁的唤醒会消耗UE的电量。为了降低功耗,延长待机时间,引入eDRX模式。eDRX就是Extended idle-mode DRX cycle,扩展不连续接收。该模式下的终端在每个eDRX周期内,只有在设置的寻呼时间窗口(Paging Time Window,PTW)内,终端可接收下行数据,其余时间处于休眠状态,不接收下行数据。对下行业务时延有较高要求,物联网平台可根据设备是否处于休眠状态缓存消息或者立即下发消息。之后,所述eDRX也引入到了inactive态。In idle mode, the maximum DRX cycle of traditional LTE is 2.56s, and frequent wake-ups consume UE power. In order to reduce power consumption and extend standby time, eDRX mode is introduced. eDRX is Extended idle-mode DRX cycle, extended discontinuous reception. In each eDRX cycle, the terminal in this mode can receive downlink data only within the set paging time window (PTW). The terminal is in a dormant state for the rest of the time and does not receive downlink data. There are high requirements for downlink business latency. The IoT platform can cache messages or send messages immediately according to whether the device is in a dormant state. Later, the eDRX was also introduced into the inactive state.
如图3所示,TeDRX_CN可以为若干个超帧(H-SFN),TeDRX_CN=2,…,1024。其中,一个H-SFN,对应1024个系统帧号(System frame number,SFN),,即一个超帧等于10.24s,,H-SFN的最大周期就是1024个H-SFN,对应2.9127hour。As shown in Figure 3, TeDRX_CN can be several superframes (H-SFN), TeDRX_CN=2,...,1024. Among them, one H-SFN corresponds to 1024 system frame numbers (SFN), that is, one superframe is equal to 10.24s, and the maximum period of H-SFN is 1024 H-SFNs, corresponding to 2.9127hour.
在引入超帧后,也引入以下几个概念:PH:paging Hyperframe,也就是寻呼消息所在的超帧号,单位H-SFN;After the introduction of superframe, the following concepts were also introduced: PH: paging Hyperframe, which is the superframe number where the paging message is located, the unit is H-SFN;
PTW:paging Time Window,寻呼时间窗口,在PH内的SFN范围[PTW_start,PTW_stop];PTW:paging Time Window, paging time window, SFN range within PH [PTW_start,PTW_stop];
PTW_start:PTW开始的位置,单位SFN;PTW_start: The starting position of PTW, unit SFN;
PTW_stop:PTW结束的位置,单位SFN。PTW_stop: The end position of PTW, unit SFN.
相关技术中,在终端处于空闲(idle)态时,无法对终端进行定位。如果要支持对idle态的终端进行定位,需要解决在配置核心网(Core Network,CN)扩展DRX周期(extended DRX cycle,eDRX)的情况下,idle态探测参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal,SRS)应该如何配置或者idle态定位参考信号PRS如何测量。In the related art, when the terminal is in an idle state, the terminal cannot be positioned. If you want to support the positioning of idle state terminals, you need to solve the problem that when configuring the Core Network (CN) extended DRX cycle (eDRX), the idle state detection reference signal (Sounding Reference Signal, SRS) should How to configure or measure the idle positioning reference signal PRS.
此外,考虑到省电机制,未来有可能在非激活(inactive)态时,引入核心网扩展DRX周期(extended DRX cycle,eDRX),或者大于10.24s的RAN扩展DRX周期(extended DRX cycle,eDRX)。这种情况下,网络侧设备如何确认终端所处的DRX,和/或如何在DRX下配置探测参考信号或者定位参考信号PRS窗口。In addition, taking into account the power saving mechanism, it is possible to introduce the extended DRX cycle (eDRX) of the core network in the inactive state in the future, or the extended DRX cycle (eDRX) of the RAN greater than 10.24s. . In this case, how does the network side device confirm the DRX where the terminal is located, and/or how to configure the detection reference signal or positioning reference signal PRS window under DRX.
如果要支持对idle态的终端进行定位,现有技术存在以下问题:If you want to support positioning of idle terminals, the existing technology has the following problems:
(1)基于现有流程,CN eDRX/DRX的配置信息是在终端注册的时候,接入和移动管理功能(Access and Mobility Management Function,AMF)发给终端的;而基站是在寻呼(paging)消息中得到的相关配置,但是目前非激活态(inactive)SRS的配置信息是基站在无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)释放(release)消息中携带的。也就是说基站在配置所述SRS的配置信息时,可能无法知道CN eDRX的配置信息,从而导致SRS的配置无法与CN eDRX/DRX的配置信息匹配,并影响终端的省电或者定位功能。此外,位置管理功能(Location Management Function,LMF)可能会向基站推荐SRS的配置 信息,但是LMF既不知道CN eDRX/DRX的配置信息,也不知道RAN eDRX/DRX的配置信息,可能导致推荐的SRS配置无法与DRX的配置信息匹配。(1) Based on the existing process, the CN eDRX/DRX configuration information is sent to the terminal by the Access and Mobility Management Function (AMF) when the terminal registers; while the base station is paging ) message, but the current inactive SRS configuration information is carried by the base station in a Radio Resource Control (RRC) release message. That is to say, when the base station configures the SRS configuration information, it may not know the CN eDRX configuration information, causing the SRS configuration to fail to match the CN eDRX/DRX configuration information and affecting the power saving or positioning functions of the terminal. In addition, the Location Management Function (LMF) may recommend SRS configuration to the base station information, but LMF neither knows the configuration information of CN eDRX/DRX nor the configuration information of RAN eDRX/DRX, which may cause the recommended SRS configuration to fail to match the DRX configuration information.
(2)现有SRS适用范围如下所述,可以理解为特定小区(cell-specific)的适用范围,但这对idle态的UE可能不足以使用:(2) The applicable scope of existing SRS is as follows, which can be understood as the applicable scope of a specific cell (cell-specific), but this may not be enough for idle UEs:
(a)跟踪区域(tracking area,TA)验证(validation)的区域;(a) Tracking area (TA) verification area;
TA timer,超时视为无效;TA timer, timeout is considered invalid;
超出RSRP阈值视为失效;Exceeding the RSRP threshold is considered a failure;
(b)小区重选(cell reselection)。(b) Cell reselection.
针对问题(1),需要解决的是UE的CN eDRX的配置信息如何及时与所属的基站交互;对于问题(2),需要解决的是TA或者多小区区域范围内,SRS的配置方法,以适用于idle态或inactive态的UE,从而不会频繁的打断eDRX状态,影响省电。For problem (1), what needs to be solved is how the UE's CN eDRX configuration information interacts with the base station to which it belongs in a timely manner; for problem (2), what needs to be solved is the SRS configuration method within the TA or multi-cell area, so as to be applicable For UE in idle or inactive state, the eDRX state will not be frequently interrupted, affecting power saving.
下面结合附图,通过一些实施例及其应用场景对本申请实施例提供的扩展非连续接收的配置方法进行详细地说明。The extended discontinuous reception configuration method provided by the embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings through some embodiments and application scenarios.
本申请实施例提供一种扩展非连续接收的配置方法,如图4所示,包括:This embodiment of the present application provides a configuration method for extended discontinuous reception, as shown in Figure 4, including:
步骤101:第一通信设备获取第一终端的第一信息,所述第一信息用于所述第一通信设备确定所述第一终端在多个非连续接收DRX配置下的目标信息;Step 101: The first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, and the first information is used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:The target information includes at least one of the following:
目标DRX配置信息;Target DRX configuration information;
定位参考信号SRS的信息;Positioning reference signal SRS information;
用于测量和/或处理定位参考信号的测量窗的信息;Information on the measurement window used to measure and/or process the positioning reference signal;
其中第一信息包括以下至少一项:The first information includes at least one of the following:
所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX的配置信息,包括DRX的周期、PTW的长度、PTW的起始位置等,由于第一通信设备可能不知道UE_ID_H,无法计算PTW的起始位置,所以可能要通知第一通信设备具体的PTW的起始位置;The configuration information of at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs includes the period of the DRX, the length of the PTW, the starting position of the PTW, etc. Since the first communication device may not know the UE_ID_H and cannot calculate the starting position of the PTW, it may be necessary to Notify the first communication device of the specific starting position of the PTW;
所述第一终端的标识信息,比如小区无线网络临时标识(Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier,C-RNTI),临时移动用户标识(5G S-Temporary Mobile Subscription Identifier,5G-STMSI),终端标识的哈希计算值UE_ID_H(13比特)等;在所述情况下,可以通知第一通信设备所述第一终端的标识,从而计算所述PTW的起始位置,paging的位置等。The identification information of the first terminal, such as Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier (C-RNTI), Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identifier (5G S-Temporary Mobile Subscription Identifier, 5G-STMSI), terminal identification It is expected to calculate the value UE_ID_H (13 bits), etc.; in this case, the first communication device can be notified of the identity of the first terminal, thereby calculating the starting position of the PTW, the paging position, etc.
所述第一终端的寻呼paging的时频位置或周期信息。The time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
在本申请实施例中,第一通信设备获取第一终端的第一信息,第一通信设备能够根据第一信息确定第一终端在多个DRX配置下的目标信息,以确定所述第一终端的目标DRX配置或者能够合理地对终端进行配置,使得SRS的配置与CN eDRX的配置信息匹配,保证第一终端的省电以及定位功能。In this embodiment of the present application, the first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, and the first communication device can determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple DRX configurations based on the first information to determine the first terminal. The target DRX configuration or the terminal can be configured reasonably so that the SRS configuration matches the CN eDRX configuration information to ensure the power saving and positioning functions of the first terminal.
本申请实施例中,第一通信设备可以是网络侧设备比如基站或位置管理功能(LMF), 第一通信设备可以从第二通信设备获取第一信息,第二通信设备可以是终端或认证管理功能(Authentication Management Function,AMF)。In this embodiment of the present application, the first communication device may be a network side device such as a base station or a location management function (LMF), The first communication device may obtain the first information from the second communication device, and the second communication device may be a terminal or an authentication management function (Authentication Management Function, AMF).
在一个可选的实施例中,第一通信设备为位置管理功能(Location Management Function,LMF),可选的第一通信设备可以进一步理解为AMF,可选的AMF从第一终端或基站获取第一信息,如基站为第一终端的DRX的配置信息,或第一终端上报从基站获取的DRX的配置信息给AMF,从而使得AMF可以给LMF提供第一信息,即第一信息至少包括所述第一终端的DRX配置信息。In an optional embodiment, the first communication device is a location management function (LMF). The optional first communication device can be further understood as an AMF. The optional AMF obtains the first terminal or the base station from the first terminal. Information, such as the base station is the DRX configuration information of the first terminal, or the first terminal reports the DRX configuration information obtained from the base station to the AMF, so that the AMF can provide the first information to the LMF, that is, the first information at least includes the DRX configuration information of the first terminal.
在另一个可选的实施例中,所述第一通信设备为位置管理功能(LMF),可选的第一通信设备可以进一步理解为基站,可选的从第一终端或AMF获取第一信息,如AMF为第一终端的CN DRX的配置信息,或第一终端上报从AMF获取的CN DRX的配置信息给基站,从而使得基站可以给LMF提供第一信息,即第一信息至少包括所述第一终端的DRX配置信息。In another optional embodiment, the first communication device is a location management function (LMF). The optional first communication device can be further understood as a base station, and the first information can optionally be obtained from the first terminal or AMF. , if the AMF is the CN DRX configuration information of the first terminal, or the first terminal reports the CN DRX configuration information obtained from the AMF to the base station, so that the base station can provide the first information to the LMF, that is, the first information at least includes the above DRX configuration information of the first terminal.
在另一个可选的实施例中,所述第一通信设备为基站,可选的第一通信设备可以进一步理解为LMF,可选的LMF从第一终端或AMF获取第一信息,从而基于第一信息确定目标信息和/或第一信息给基站,从而使得基站可以得到LMF提供第一信息,和/或LMF推荐的目标信息。In another optional embodiment, the first communication device is a base station, the optional first communication device can be further understood as an LMF, and the optional LMF obtains the first information from the first terminal or AMF, thereby based on the first A piece of information determines the target information and/or the first information to the base station, so that the base station can obtain the first information provided by the LMF and/or the target information recommended by the LMF.
一些实施例中,所述多个DRX包括以下至少两项:In some embodiments, the plurality of DRXs include at least two of the following:
核心网CN扩展非连续接收eDRX;Core network CN extends discontinuous reception eDRX;
CN DRX;CN DRX;
默认的无线接入网RAN paging;Default radio access network RAN paging;
默认的DRX;Default DRX;
默认的eDRX;Default eDRX;
UE专属的DRX;UE exclusive DRX;
UE专属的eDRX;UE-specific eDRX;
大于10.24s的RAN eDRX;RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s;
小于10.24s的RAN eDRX。RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
本申请实施例中,第一通信设备获取第一终端的第一信息后,可以根据第一信息确定第一终端在多个DRX配置下的目标信息,比如:第一终端可以在RAN eDRX和CN eDRX的配置下,确定目标eDRX的配置信息。所述目标DRX配置为第一终端使用的DRX配置,可以为多个DRX中的一个,也可以是根据多个DRX确定的一个目标DRX配置。所述目标DRX配置为第一终端使用的DRX配置。In the embodiment of this application, after the first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, it can determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple DRX configurations based on the first information. For example, the first terminal can determine the target information of the first terminal under RAN eDRX and CN. Under eDRX configuration, determine the configuration information of the target eDRX. The target DRX configuration is a DRX configuration used by the first terminal, which may be one of multiple DRXs, or may be a target DRX configuration determined based on multiple DRXs. The target DRX configuration is the DRX configuration used by the first terminal.
可选的如下表所示,对于idle态的UE,若所述CN eDRX的周期小于10.24s,则所述第一终端的目标DRX为所述CN eDRX的配置;若所述CN eDRX的周期大于10.24s,在PTW外,按照第一终端的目标DRX根据CN eDRX确定(如,在PTW外,所述周期等于CN eDRX的周期);在所述PTW内,第一终端的目标DRX需要结合所述CN eDRX, 默认的paging周期等确定目标DRX的on的时间。
Optionally, as shown in the following table, for a UE in the idle state, if the cycle of the CN eDRX is less than 10.24s, the target DRX of the first terminal is the configuration of the CN eDRX; if the cycle of the CN eDRX is greater than 10.24s, outside the PTW, the target DRX of the first terminal is determined based on the CN eDRX (for example, outside the PTW, the period is equal to the period of the CN eDRX); within the PTW, the target DRX of the first terminal needs to be combined with all Describing CN eDRX, The default paging cycle determines the on time of the target DRX.
可选的,对于inactive态的第一终端,第一终端获取的多个DRX的配置信息,可选的为CN eDRX,RAN eDRX的配置信息,第一通信设备确定的目标DRX的周期为min{CN eDRX,RAN eDRX},或者二者的公约数或公倍数,或者为二者中按照协议,约定或者网络指定的一个,且若所述CN eDRX,RAN eDRX均包括PTW,所述PTW的位置为两个指定的PTW之和,或者两个PTW按照协议,约定或者网络指定的一个PTW,又或者为两个PTW的交集。此外,所述CN eDRX和RAN eDRX只是为多个DRX的配置的一种举例,可选的还可以是如下的任意组合,且所述目标DRX可以由所述第一终端配置的多个DRX和协议,约定或者网络指定来最终确定:Optionally, for the inactive first terminal, the configuration information of multiple DRXs obtained by the first terminal is optionally the configuration information of CN eDRX and RAN eDRX. The target DRX cycle determined by the first communication device is min{ CN eDRX, RAN eDRX}, or the common divisor or common multiple of the two, or one of the two specified in accordance with the agreement, agreement or network, and if the CN eDRX, RAN eDRX both include PTW, the position of the PTW is The sum of two specified PTWs, or the two PTWs specified by the protocol, agreement or network, or the intersection of the two PTWs. In addition, the CN eDRX and RAN eDRX are just an example of the configuration of multiple DRXs. The optional ones can also be any combination of the following, and the target DRX can be multiple DRXs and DRXs configured by the first terminal. Agreement, convention, or network designation to finalize:
核心网CN扩展非连续接收eDRX;Core network CN extends discontinuous reception eDRX;
CN DRX;CN DRX;
默认的无线接入网RAN paging;Default radio access network RAN paging;
默认的DRX;Default DRX;
默认的eDRX;Default eDRX;
UE专属的DRX;UE exclusive DRX;
UE专属的eDRX;UE-specific eDRX;
大于10.24s的RAN eDRX;RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s;
小于10.24s的RAN eDRX。RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
又比如,第一通信设备可以确定所述第一终端在多个DRX配置下,用于定位的参考信号(SRS)的配置信息。在一个可选的实施例中,所述第一终端在多个DRX配置中的一个DRX配置下,如在>10.24s的RAN eDRX或CN eDRX下用于定位的参考信号(SRS)的配置信息;在另一个可选的实施例中,所述第一终端在多个DRX配置下,首先第一通信网确定所述第一终端的目标DRX配置信息,所述目标DRX配置为第一终端使用的DRX配置,然后确定所述在目标DRX下用于定位的参考信号(SRS)的配置信息。For another example, the first communication device may determine the configuration information of the reference signal (SRS) used for positioning by the first terminal under multiple DRX configurations. In an optional embodiment, the first terminal is in one DRX configuration among multiple DRX configurations, such as the configuration information of the reference signal (SRS) for positioning under RAN eDRX or CN eDRX >10.24s. ; In another optional embodiment, the first terminal is in multiple DRX configurations. First, the first communication network determines the target DRX configuration information of the first terminal, and the target DRX configuration is used by the first terminal. DRX configuration, and then determine the configuration information of the reference signal (SRS) used for positioning under the target DRX.
又比如,第一通信设备可以确定所述第一终端在多个DRX配置下,用于测量定位参考信号的测量窗的配置信息。在一个可选的实施例中,所述第一终端在多个DRX配置中的一个DRX配置下,如在>10.24s的RAN eDRX或CN eDRX下用于测量定位参考信号的测量窗的配置信息;在另一个可选的实施例中,所述第一终端在多个DRX配置下,首先 第一通信设备确定所述第一终端的目标DRX配置信息,所述目标DRX配置为第一终端使用的DRX配置,然后确定所述在目标DRX下用于测量定位参考信号的测量窗的配置信息。For another example, the first communication device may determine the configuration information of the measurement window used by the first terminal to measure positioning reference signals under multiple DRX configurations. In an optional embodiment, the first terminal is configured in one DRX configuration among multiple DRX configurations, such as the configuration information of the measurement window for measuring positioning reference signals under RAN eDRX or CN eDRX >10.24s. ; In another optional embodiment, the first terminal is in multiple DRX configurations, first The first communication device determines the target DRX configuration information of the first terminal, the target DRX configuration is the DRX configuration used by the first terminal, and then determines the configuration information of the measurement window used to measure the positioning reference signal under the target DRX. .
一些实施例中,所述第一通信设备获取所述第一终端的第一信息包括:In some embodiments, the first communication device obtaining the first information of the first terminal includes:
所述第一通信设备从所述第一终端获取所述第一信息;或The first communication device obtains the first information from the first terminal; or
所述第一通信设备从AMF获取所述第一信息。The first communication device obtains the first information from the AMF.
可选的,第一通信设备比如基站可以从第一终端获取第一辅助信息,也可以从AMF获取第一辅助信息。Optionally, the first communication device, such as the base station, may obtain the first auxiliary information from the first terminal, or may obtain the first auxiliary information from the AMF.
可选的,第一通信设备比如LMF可以从第一终端获取第一辅助信息,也可以从AMF获取第一辅助信息。Optionally, the first communication device such as the LMF can obtain the first auxiliary information from the first terminal, or can also obtain the first auxiliary information from the AMF.
一些实施例中,所述第一通信设备从所述第一终端获取的所述第一信息包含于所述第一终端上报的第一辅助信息中。一些情况下,基站接收第一终端上报的第一辅助信息,用于帮助基站确定所述第一终端的省电或者定位相关的信息,在一个可选的实施例中,第一辅助信息嵌在移动发起位置请求(MO-LR request)或者事件报告(event report)中,,即在所述第一通信设备为基站的情况下,所述第一信息携带在移动发起位置请求(MO-LR request)或者事件报告(event report)消息中。在另一个可选的实施例中,第一辅助信息在无线资源控制(RRC)消息中上报给基站,即在所述第一通信设备为基站的情况下,所述第一信息携带在RRC消息中;在又一个实施例中,在长期演进定位协议(Long Term Evolution Positioning Protocol,LPP)消息中上报给LMF,即在所述第一通信设备为LMF的情况下,所述第一辅助信息携带在LPP消息中。在所述第一终端处于RRC非激活态或空闲态时,所述第一辅助信息携带在小数据传输SDT中。在又一个可选的实施例中,所述第一辅助信息携带在非接入层(Non-access stratum,NAS)消息中发送给AMF。In some embodiments, the first information obtained by the first communication device from the first terminal is included in the first auxiliary information reported by the first terminal. In some cases, the base station receives the first auxiliary information reported by the first terminal to help the base station determine power saving or positioning-related information of the first terminal. In an optional embodiment, the first auxiliary information is embedded in In a mobile-initiated location request (MO-LR request) or an event report, that is, when the first communication device is a base station, the first information is carried in a mobile-initiated location request (MO-LR request). ) or event report message. In another optional embodiment, the first assistance information is reported to the base station in a radio resource control (RRC) message, that is, when the first communication device is a base station, the first information is carried in the RRC message. in; in another embodiment, the first auxiliary information is reported to the LMF in a Long Term Evolution Positioning Protocol (LPP) message, that is, when the first communication device is an LMF, the first auxiliary information carries in LPP messages. When the first terminal is in the RRC inactive state or idle state, the first auxiliary information is carried in the small data transmission SDT. In yet another optional embodiment, the first auxiliary information is carried in a Non-access stratum (NAS) message and sent to the AMF.
其中,在第一终端上报第一辅助信息时,所述第一辅助信息还包括以下至少一项:Wherein, when the first terminal reports the first auxiliary information, the first auxiliary information also includes at least one of the following:
所述第一终端倾向的无线资源控制RRC状态,以及在上述状态下,第一终端倾向的用于定位的参考信号(SRS)的配置信息,和/或,第一终端倾向的用于测量定位参考信号的测量窗的配置信息;The radio resource control RRC state preferred by the first terminal, and in the above state, the configuration information of the reference signal (SRS) used for positioning preferred by the first terminal, and/or used for measurement positioning preferred by the first terminal Configuration information of the measurement window of the reference signal;
所述第一终端倾向的目标DRX的配置信息;Configuration information of the target DRX preferred by the first terminal;
定位的优先级;Positioning priority;
CN eDRX使能信息或大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的使能信息;CN eDRX enabling information or RAN eDRX enabling information greater than 10.24s;
所述第一终端倾向的大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的配置信息,包括eDRX的周期、PTW的长度、PTW的起始位置等,由于第一通信设备可能不知道UE_ID_H,无法计算PTW的起始位置,所以可能要通知第一通信设备具体的PTW的起始位置;The configuration information of the RAN eDRX that the first terminal prefers is greater than 10.24s, including the eDRX cycle, the length of the PTW, the starting position of the PTW, etc. Since the first communication device may not know the UE_ID_H, it cannot calculate the starting position of the PTW. , so it may be necessary to notify the first communication device of the specific starting position of the PTW;
所述第一终端倾向的目标信息的配置区域的信息,包括RAN eDRX配置、SRS配置或者PPW配置的区域,配置区域的信息包括以下至少一项:小区列表(Cell list);Tracking area标识;注册区域;接入网通知区域(RNA)标识;区域标识;当前小区;The information of the configuration area of the target information preferred by the first terminal includes the area of RAN eDRX configuration, SRS configuration or PPW configuration. The information of the configuration area includes at least one of the following: cell list (Cell list); Tracking area identification; registration Area; access network notification area (RNA) identifier; area identifier; current cell;
所述CN eDRX或CN DRX的配置区域的信息,配置区域的信息包括以下至少一项: 小区列表(Cell list);Tracking area标识;注册区域;RNA标识;区域标识;当前小区。The information of the configuration area of the CN eDRX or CN DRX, the information of the configuration area includes at least one of the following: Cell list (Cell list); Tracking area identification; registration area; RNA identification; area identification; current cell.
即第一辅助信息除包括第一信息之外,还包括上述信息。That is, the first auxiliary information includes the above information in addition to the first information.
其中,在第一终端发送的第一辅助信息中包括倾向的大于10.24的RAN eDRX的配置信息时,可以根据以下公式计算PTW的起始位置H-SFN:Wherein, when the first auxiliary information sent by the first terminal includes the configuration information of the RAN eDRX with a tendency greater than 10.24, the starting position H-SFN of the PTW can be calculated according to the following formula:
H-SFN modTeDRX_RAN=(UE_ID_H mod TeDRX_RAN),(公式1)或者H-SFN modT eDRX_RAN = (UE_ID_H mod T eDRX_RAN ), (Formula 1) or
H-SFN modTeDRX_CN=(UE_ID_H modTeDRX_CN),(公式2)H-SFN modT eDRX_CN = (UE_ID_H modT eDRX_CN ), (Formula 2)
其中,TeDRX_CN为CN eDRX的周期,TeDRX_RAN为RAN eDRX的周期,TeDRX_RAN可以与TeDRX_CN相等,或者,取配置的RAN eDRX的周期和TeDRX_CN中的最小值。Among them, T eDRX_CN is the cycle of CN eDRX, and T eDRX_RAN is the cycle of RAN eDRX. T eDRX_RAN can be equal to T eDRX_CN , or it can take the minimum value of the configured RAN eDRX cycle and T eDRX_CN .
可选的,在一种情况下,CN侧的PTW的起始位置H-SFN根据公式2获得,为保证所述RAN侧与CN侧对齐,所述期望的RAN侧的eDRX周期为CN侧的公约数,或者所述RAN侧计算的PTW的起始位置包括CN侧的H-SFN,或者所述RAN侧计算的PTW的起始位置为CN侧的H-SFN。Optionally, in one case, the starting position H-SFN of the PTW on the CN side is obtained according to Formula 2. To ensure that the RAN side is aligned with the CN side, the expected eDRX cycle of the RAN side is that of the CN side. The common denominator is that either the starting position of the PTW calculated on the RAN side includes the H-SFN on the CN side, or the starting position of the PTW calculated on the RAN side is the H-SFN on the CN side.
可选的,对于第一终端来说,在处于idle或inactive时的PTW起始位置可能不同,这种情况下,可以根据协议,约定或者网络侧指示确定PTW位置,如,在第一终端处于inactive态时,可以根据RAN eDRX的周期计算PTW起始位置,比如,根据RAN eDRX的周期和RAN侧UE ID(如C-RNTI,fullI-RNTI,I-RNTI-Value,shortI-RNTI,ShortI-RNTI-Value)计算PTW起始位置;在第一终端处于idle态时,可以根据CN_eDRX的周期计算PTW起始位置,比如根据CN eDRX的周期和CN侧UE ID(如UE_ID_H,5G-STMSI)计算PTW起始位置。又比如,根据RAN eDRX的周期和CN eDRX的周期计算所述PTW,如,CN eDRX的周期大于RAN的eDRX周期,采用RAN eDRX的周期,如采用二者的公约数计算的周期确认PTW的位置等。Optionally, for the first terminal, the starting position of the PTW may be different when it is idle or inactive. In this case, the PTW position may be determined according to the protocol, convention or network side instruction. For example, when the first terminal is in In the inactive state, the PTW starting position can be calculated based on the RAN eDRX cycle, for example, based on the RAN eDRX cycle and the RAN side UE ID (such as C-RNTI, fullI-RNTI, I-RNTI-Value, shortI-RNTI, ShortI- RNTI-Value) to calculate the PTW starting position; when the first terminal is in the idle state, the PTW starting position can be calculated based on the cycle of CN_eDRX, such as based on the cycle of CN eDRX and the CN side UE ID (such as UE_ID_H, 5G-STMSI). PTW starting position. For another example, the PTW is calculated based on the cycle of RAN eDRX and the cycle of CN eDRX. For example, if the cycle of CN eDRX is greater than the eDRX cycle of RAN, the cycle of RAN eDRX is used. For example, the cycle calculated by using the common divisor of the two is used to confirm the position of the PTW. wait.
为了实现区域性定位,idle态和inactive态的PTW起始位置相关,比如,在第一终端处于inactive态时,可以根据CN eDRX的周期和UE ID计算RAN eDRX的周期以及PTW的起始位置。可选的,可以根据CN eDRX的周期和CN侧UE ID计算RAN eDRX的周期以及PTW的起始位置,在这种情况下,可选的,第一通信设备不知道所述PTW的配置,第一终端可以上报所述PTW的起始位置和长度信息的至少之一,又或者上报CN eDRX和CN侧UE ID信息给第一通信设备。In order to achieve regional positioning, the PTW start positions in the idle state and inactive state are related. For example, when the first terminal is in the inactive state, the RAN eDRX cycle and the PTW start position can be calculated based on the CN eDRX cycle and UE ID. Optionally, the period of RAN eDRX and the starting position of PTW can be calculated based on the period of CN eDRX and the CN side UE ID. In this case, optionally, the first communication device does not know the configuration of the PTW. A terminal may report at least one of the starting position and length information of the PTW, or report CN eDRX and CN side UE ID information to the first communication device.
一些实施例中,在AMF向基站发送的RRC inactive或idle态UE的第一辅助信息时,第一辅助信息可以包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, when the AMF sends the first assistance information of the RRC inactive or idle UE to the base station, the first assistance information may include at least one of the following:
UE专属的DRX;UE exclusive DRX;
UE专属的eDRX,比如CN eDRX,包括eDRX的周期长度、PTW的长度以及PTW的起始位置等;UE-specific eDRX, such as CN eDRX, includes the cycle length of eDRX, the length of PTW, and the starting position of PTW, etc.;
倾向目标信息的配置区域的信息,配置区域的信息包括以下至少一项:小区列表(Cell list);Tracking area标识;注册区域;RNA标识;区域标识;当前小区。The information of the configuration area that tends to the target information. The information of the configuration area includes at least one of the following: cell list (Cell list); Tracking area identifier; Registration area; RNA identifier; Area identifier; Current cell.
一些实施例中,在所述第一通信设备为基站的情况下,所述第一通信设备从AMF获 取的所述第一信息携带在以下至少一项中:In some embodiments, when the first communication device is a base station, the first communication device obtains the The first information obtained is carried in at least one of the following:
注册请求,在切换(handover)过程中;Registration request, during handover process;
服务请求;Request for service;
切换请求;Switch request;
N2消息;N2 message;
N2消息的激活消息;Activation message of N2 message;
定位寻呼原因(paging cause for positioning);paging cause for positioning;
N2挂起响应消息(N2suspend response)。N2 suspend response message (N2suspend response).
一些实施例中,在所述第一通信设备为LMF的情况下,所述第一通信设备从AMF获取的所述第一信息携带在以下至少一项中:In some embodiments, when the first communication device is an LMF, the first information obtained by the first communication device from the AMF is carried in at least one of the following:
所述AMF发送的位置服务请求;The location service request sent by the AMF;
Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation消息。Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation message.
一些实施例中,所述第一信息还包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the first information further includes at least one of the following:
CN eDRX使能信息或大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的使能信息;CN eDRX enabling information or RAN eDRX enabling information greater than 10.24s;
目标信息的配置区域的信息。Information about the configuration area of the target information.
一具体示例中,第一信息可以包括以下至少一项:In a specific example, the first information may include at least one of the following:
第一终端的标识;可选的,第一终端的标识信息为CN侧的标识信息,临时移动用户标识(5G-STMSI),终端标识的哈希计算值UE_ID_H(13比特)等,可选的,第一终端的比如小区无线网络临时标识(C-RNTI);The identification of the first terminal; optionally, the identification information of the first terminal is the identification information of the CN side, the temporary mobile subscriber identity (5G-STMSI), the hash calculation value of the terminal identification UE_ID_H (13 bits), etc., optional , such as the Cell Radio Network Temporary Identity (C-RNTI) of the first terminal;
CN eDRX的配置信息,包括eDRX的周期,PTW的长度,PTW的起始位置等;CN eDRX configuration information, including eDRX cycle, PTW length, PTW starting position, etc.;
CN eDRX使能信息或大于10.24的RAN eDRX的使能信息,包括eDRX的周期,PTW的长度,PTW的起始位置等;CN eDRX enabling information or RAN eDRX enabling information greater than 10.24, including eDRX cycle, PTW length, PTW starting position, etc.;
RAN eDRX的配置区域的信息,配置区域的信息包括以下至少一项:小区列表(Cell list);Tracking area标识;RNA标识;区域标识;RAN eDRX configuration area information, the configuration area information includes at least one of the following: cell list (Cell list); Tracking area identification; RNA identification; area identification;
CN eDRX的配置区域的信息,配置区域的信息包括以下至少一项:小区列表(Cell list);Tracking area标识;RNA标识;区域标识。CN eDRX configuration area information, the configuration area information includes at least one of the following: cell list (Cell list); Tracking area identification; RNA identification; area identification.
第一通信设备从AMF获取的第一信息可以携带在Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation消息。图5是本申请实施例MT-LR的过程示意图,如图5所示,可以在步骤7中的Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation中携带第一信息;图6是本申请实施例MO-LR的过程示意图,如图6所示,可以在步骤4中的Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation中携带第一信息。The first information obtained by the first communication device from the AMF may be carried in the Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation message. Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of the process of MT-LR in this embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 5, the first information can be carried in Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation in step 7; Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of the process of MO-LR in this embodiment of the present application, as shown in Figure 6 As shown, the first information can be carried in Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation in step 4.
一些实施例中,所述第一通信设备为LMF,所述方法还包括:In some embodiments, the first communication device is an LMF, and the method further includes:
所述第一通信设备推荐所述终端的第一目标信息给基站,以使所述基站结合所述第一目标信息确定配置给终端的目标信息。这样可以使得基站合理地对终端进行配置,使得SRS的配置与CN eDRX/CN DRX的配置信息匹配,保证第一终端的省电以及定位功能。 或者,这样可以使得基站合理地对终端进行配置,使得SRS的配置与终端的目标DRX的配置信息匹配,保证第一终端的省电以及定位功能,或者,这样可以使得基站合理地对终端进行配置,使得SRS的配置与终端被配置的多个DRX的配置信息匹配,保证第一终端的省电以及定位功能。The first communication device recommends the first target information of the terminal to the base station, so that the base station determines the target information configured for the terminal in combination with the first target information. In this way, the base station can reasonably configure the terminal, so that the SRS configuration matches the CN eDRX/CN DRX configuration information, ensuring the power saving and positioning functions of the first terminal. Alternatively, this allows the base station to reasonably configure the terminal so that the SRS configuration matches the target DRX configuration information of the terminal, ensuring the power saving and positioning functions of the first terminal. Alternatively, this allows the base station to reasonably configure the terminal. , so that the configuration of the SRS matches the configuration information of multiple DRXs configured for the terminal, ensuring the power saving and positioning functions of the first terminal.
一些实施例中,第一通信设备获取所述第一终端的第一信息之前,所述方法还包括:In some embodiments, before the first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, the method further includes:
所述第一通信设备向所述第一终端或AMF发送请求信息,指示所述第一终端或AMF反馈所述第一信息。这样在第一通信设备需要获取第一信息时,可以通过请求信息指示第一终端或AMF反馈所述第一信息,帮助第一通信设备确定目标信息。比如第一通信设备为基站时,可以帮助基站在RRC release消息中配置目标信息。The first communication device sends request information to the first terminal or AMF, instructing the first terminal or AMF to feed back the first information. In this way, when the first communication device needs to obtain the first information, it can instruct the first terminal or the AMF to feed back the first information by requesting information to help the first communication device determine the target information. For example, when the first communication device is a base station, it can help the base station configure target information in the RRC release message.
其中,请求信息可以携带在以下至少一项中:Among them, the request information can be carried in at least one of the following:
服务请求(Service request);Service request;
注册请求(Registration request);Registration request;
N2挂起请求(N2suspend request);N2 suspend request (N2suspend request);
N2恢复请求(N2resume request);N2 resume request (N2resume request);
RRC状态报告信息。RRC status report information.
上述请求消息为基站发送AMF的请求消息;The above request message is a request message for the base station to send AMF;
在一些实施例中,所述请求消息可以携带在RRC消息中,用于基站请求终端发送第一信息。In some embodiments, the request message may be carried in an RRC message and used by the base station to request the terminal to send the first information.
在一些实施例中,所述请求消息中可以携带LPP或其的扩展消息中,用于LMF请求终端发送第一消息In some embodiments, the request message may carry LPP or its extended message, which is used by the LMF to request the terminal to send the first message.
在一些实施例中,LMF还可以向AMF或基站发送请求消息用于请求第一信息;In some embodiments, the LMF may also send a request message to the AMF or the base station to request the first information;
一些实施例中,第一通信设备获取所述第一终端的第一信息之后,所述方法还包括:In some embodiments, after the first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, the method further includes:
所述第一通信设备向所述第一终端发送所述目标信息。The first communication device sends the target information to the first terminal.
一些实施例中,第一通信设备获取所述第一终端的第一信息之后,所述方法还包括:In some embodiments, after the first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, the method further includes:
所述第一通信设备向所述第一终端或AMF发送响应信息,所述响应信息包括所述目标信息,这样可以通过响应信息对第一终端进行配置。The first communication device sends response information to the first terminal or AMF, where the response information includes the target information, so that the first terminal can be configured through the response information.
一些实施例中,触发所述第一通信设备获取所述第一信息或者确定所述目标信息的触发事件包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the triggering event that triggers the first communication device to obtain the first information or determine the target information includes at least one of the following:
定位服务请求,如Defered MT-LR过程中,如,基站基于定位服务请求决定从RRC连接态切换到其它状态;如,AMF转发定位服务请求消息时,携带所述第一终端的CN DRX,CN eDRX配置信息,第一终端的识别信息至少之一给LMF;Positioning service request, such as the Defered MT-LR process, for example, the base station decides to switch from the RRC connection state to other states based on the positioning service request; for example, when the AMF forwards the positioning service request message, it carries the CN DRX of the first terminal, CN eDRX configuration information, at least one of the identification information of the first terminal is provided to the LMF;
网络侧设备准备在RRC释放release消息中配置所述目标信息,可以在第一终端进入inactive或idle态之前触发;在一些实施例中,网络侧准备切换到inactive或idle态,向AMF发送请求消息,以获得第一消息,比如所述第一终端的CN DRX,CN eDRX配置信息,第一终端的识别信息至少之一。 The network side device prepares to configure the target information in the RRC release message, which can be triggered before the first terminal enters the inactive or idle state; in some embodiments, the network side prepares to switch to the inactive or idle state and sends a request message to the AMF. to obtain the first message, such as at least one of the first terminal's CN DRX, CN eDRX configuration information, and the first terminal's identification information.
第一终端倾向进入eDRX并保留定位服务,可以进入inactive或idle态之前触发;The first terminal tends to enter eDRX and retain positioning services, which can be triggered before entering the inactive or idle state;
AMF接收到延迟终端终止定位请求MT-LR、MT-LR和终端始发定位请求MO-LR中的至少一项;The AMF receives at least one of the delayed terminal terminated positioning request MT-LR, MT-LR and the terminal originated positioning request MO-LR;
AMF收到位于CN eDRX或大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的终端的位置服务请求;AMF receives a location service request from a terminal located at CN eDRX or RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s;
终端收到用于指示低功率low power的指示信息;The terminal receives indication information indicating low power;
AMF收到包括指示为低功率low power的位置服务请求。AMF receives a location service request that includes an indication of low power.
在触发事件为AMF接收到延迟终端终止定位请求MT-LR、MT-LR和终端始发定位请求MO-LR中的至少一项时,包括以下几种情况:When the triggering event is that the AMF receives at least one of the delayed terminal termination request MT-LR, MT-LR and terminal-initiated positioning request MO-LR, the following situations include:
(1)AMF收到位于idle态或inactive态第一终端的位置服务请求,比如收到MO-LR的LCS(如特定的event检测到后,如位置变化,如area变化,周期到了,发送相关的请求给AMF),或者,收到第一终端发送的“LCS MO-LR invoke”,第一终端已经处于eDRX状态下,第一终端根据之前的event trigger触发上报,或者UE判断可以进入eDRX;(1) AMF receives a location service request from the first terminal in the idle state or inactive state, such as receiving the LCS of MO-LR (for example, after a specific event is detected, such as location changes, such as area changes, the cycle is up, and the relevant request to AMF), or after receiving the "LCS MO-LR invoke" sent by the first terminal, the first terminal is already in the eDRX state, and the first terminal triggers the report based on the previous event trigger, or the UE determines that it can enter eDRX;
(2)AMF收到核心网设备(GMLS)发送的location request,且第一终端处于eDRX状态,也就是UE处于eDRX状态,MME(移动性管理实体)发送LCS给LMF,包含上述第一信息,可以理解为这种情况下UE已经位于eDRX状态收到所述位置服务请求。(2) AMF receives the location request sent by the core network equipment (GMLS), and the first terminal is in the eDRX state, that is, the UE is in the eDRX state. The MME (mobility management entity) sends LCS to the LMF, including the above first information, It can be understood that in this case, the UE is already in the eDRX state and receives the location service request.
值得注意的是其中,上述eDRX包括以下至少一项:It is worth noting that the above-mentioned eDRX includes at least one of the following:
目标eDRX;target eDRX;
终端倾向的目标eDRX;Terminal-inclined target eDRX;
CN eDRX;CN eDRX;
默认的eDRX;Default eDRX;
UE专属的eDRX;UE-specific eDRX;
大于10.24s的RAN eDRX;RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s;
小于10.24s的RAN eDRX。RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
一具体示例中,如图10所示,步骤14为触发条件,可以触发步骤15中的位置请求包括所述第一信息。如图10所示,在LTE系统中,由移动性管理实体发送该位置请求,在NR系统中,可以由AMF发送该位置请求。In a specific example, as shown in Figure 10, step 14 is a trigger condition, which can trigger the location request in step 15 to include the first information. As shown in Figure 10, in the LTE system, the mobility management entity sends the location request, and in the NR system, the AMF may send the location request.
一些实施例中,所述多个DRX包括eDRX时,所述eDRX的配置信息包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, when the plurality of DRXs include eDRX, the configuration information of the eDRX includes at least one of the following:
eDRX的周期;eDRX cycle;
寻呼时间窗口PTW的长度;The length of the paging time window PTW;
PTW的起始位置;The starting position of PTW;
其中,所述eDRX包括以下至少一项:Wherein, the eDRX includes at least one of the following:
目标eDRX;target eDRX;
终端倾向的目标eDRX;Terminal-inclined target eDRX;
CN eDRX; CN eDRX;
默认的eDRX;Default eDRX;
UE专属的eDRX;UE-specific eDRX;
大于10.24s的RAN eDRX;RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s;
小于10.24s的RAN eDRX。RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
其中,上述eDRX的配置信息可以包括以下至少一项:The above eDRX configuration information may include at least one of the following:
RAN eDRX周期,以使所述RAN eDRX周期与所述CN eDRX相等或可以被整除;RAN eDRX cycle, such that said RAN eDRX cycle is equal to or divisible by said CN eDRX;
RAN eDRX PTW的长度;RAN eDRX PTW length;
RAN eDRX PTW起始位置。RAN eDRX PTW starting position.
RAN eDRX PTW起始位置可以与所述CN eDRX PTW重叠,或者位于CN eDRX PTW中;或者,重叠的周期的RAN eDRX PTW起始位置,与所述CN eDRX PTW重叠,或者位于CN eDRX PTW中,或者,所述PTW的超帧号相同。The RAN eDRX PTW start position may overlap with the CN eDRX PTW, or be located in the CN eDRX PTW; or, the RAN eDRX PTW start position of the overlapping period, overlap with the CN eDRX PTW, or be located in the CN eDRX PTW, Or, the superframe numbers of the PTWs are the same.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗的信息包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the measurement window information includes at least one of the following:
所述测量窗的预配置标识;在一个可选的实施例中,包括一个或多个测量窗,所述预配置标识用于识别所述一个或多个测量窗;Preconfigured identification of the measurement window; in an optional embodiment, one or more measurement windows are included, and the preconfigured identification is used to identify the one or more measurement windows;
所述测量窗的时域位置,包括测量窗的超帧号,帧号SFN,时隙位置slot offset等,可以用于确定测量窗的起始位置;在一个可选的实施例中,所述测量窗的超帧号可以根据PTW的超帧号获取,又比如,所述测量窗的超帧号,帧号SFN,时隙位置slot offset等可以配置在测量窗配置信息中,又比如所述测量窗的位置为相对于paging的相对位置。所述测量窗的时域位置还包括测量窗的终止位置。The time domain position of the measurement window, including the superframe number of the measurement window, the frame number SFN, the slot position slot offset, etc., can be used to determine the starting position of the measurement window; in an optional embodiment, the The superframe number of the measurement window can be obtained according to the superframe number of the PTW. For example, the superframe number of the measurement window, the frame number SFN, the slot position slot offset, etc. can be configured in the measurement window configuration information. For example, as described above The position of the measurement window is relative to paging. The time domain position of the measurement window also includes the end position of the measurement window.
所述测量窗的长度;在一个可选的实施例中,所述测量窗的长度为N个ms或者M个slot,或L个帧长,可选的N,M,L可以取1,2,4,6,8,10,20,40等至少之一,在一个可选的实施例,所述测量窗的长度可以配置在测量窗配置信息中;The length of the measurement window; in an optional embodiment, the length of the measurement window is N ms or M slots, or L frame length, optional N, M, L can be 1, 2 , at least one of 4, 6, 8, 10, 20, 40, etc. In an optional embodiment, the length of the measurement window can be configured in the measurement window configuration information;
所述测量窗的周期,在一个可选的实施例中,所述测量窗的长度为N1个ms或者M1个slot,或L1个帧长,可选的N1,M1,L1可以取10,20,40,60,80,128,256,512等至少之一,在一个可选的实施例,所述测量窗的周期可以配置在测量窗配置信息中。在一个可选的实施例,所述测量窗的周期为根据协议或者约定确定的,如在PTW外等于eDRX的周期,在PTW内,等于paging的周期。The period of the measurement window, in an optional embodiment, the length of the measurement window is N1 ms or M1 slots, or L1 frame length, optional N1, M1, L1 can be 10, 20 , at least one of 40, 60, 80, 128, 256, 512, etc. In an optional embodiment, the period of the measurement window can be configured in the measurement window configuration information. In an optional embodiment, the period of the measurement window is determined according to a protocol or convention, such as equal to the period of eDRX outside the PTW, and equal to the period of paging within the PTW.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗的信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联,包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the information of the measurement window is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
所述测量窗与终端的标识信息存在关联关系,比如测量窗的时域位置根据第一终端的标识信息计算得到;在一个可选的实施例中,所述测量窗的时域位置为根据第一终端的标识信息,和/或时域偏移指示信息K1确定。The measurement window is associated with the identification information of the terminal. For example, the time domain position of the measurement window is calculated based on the identification information of the first terminal. In an optional embodiment, the time domain position of the measurement window is calculated based on the first terminal. The identification information of a terminal and/or the time domain offset indication information K1 are determined.
所述测量窗的周期与PTW相关;在一个可选的实施例中,所述测量窗的周期为PTW的周期。在另一个可选的实施例中,所述测量窗的周期在PTW内或PTW外的周期不同。在又一个可选的实施例中,所述某一周期的测量窗的位于PTW外,则所述周期的测量窗 被丢弃,并不执行所述定位参考信号的测量或处理。The period of the measurement window is related to the PTW; in an optional embodiment, the period of the measurement window is the period of the PTW. In another optional embodiment, the period of the measurement window is different within the PTW or outside the PTW. In yet another optional embodiment, the measurement window of a certain period is located outside the PTW, then the measurement window of the period is discarded and no measurement or processing of the positioning reference signal is performed.
所述测量窗的超帧与所述PTW的超帧相关,在一个可选的实施例中,所述测量窗的超帧与所述PTW的超帧相同。The superframe of the measurement window is related to the superframe of the PTW. In an optional embodiment, the superframe of the measurement window is the same as the superframe of the PTW.
所述测量窗的起始slot与寻呼机会PO和/或寻呼帧PF相关,在一个可选的实施例中,帧位置与PF相同,但帧内偏移不同,帧内偏移S0与PO有关或为常数,如位于PO后S0个slot;在另一个可选的实施例中,所述测量窗的周期的帧位置为:SFN mode T=K,K与T/N有关,或,K为常数,或者所述测量窗的周期的帧位置为:slot number mode T=S0,K与T/N有关,或,K为常数;The starting slot of the measurement window is related to the paging opportunity PO and/or the paging frame PF. In an optional embodiment, the frame position is the same as the PF, but the intra-frame offset is different. The intra-frame offset S0 is the same as PO. Relevant or constant, such as located S0 slots after PO; in another optional embodiment, the frame position of the period of the measurement window is: SFN mode T=K, K is related to T/N, or, K is a constant, or the frame position of the period of the measurement window is: slot number mode T=S0, K is related to T/N, or K is a constant;
其中,所述PTW包括以下至少一项:Wherein, the PTW includes at least one of the following:
所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
所述目标DRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by the target DRX;
所述终端最终确定的PTW位置。The terminal's final determined PTW position.
其中,在确定测量窗PPW时,可以通过指示帧偏移,相对于PF的偏移来确定测量窗;在确定测量窗PPW的所在的时隙或符号偏移时,可以通过指示时隙偏移或符号偏移,确定相对于参考时域位置所在的时隙或符号起点。其中,参考时域位置为PO所处的slot,周期的第一个slot,指定的slot等至少一个。Among them, when determining the measurement window PPW, the measurement window can be determined by indicating the frame offset and the offset relative to the PF; when determining the time slot or symbol offset of the measurement window PPW, the measurement window can be determined by indicating the time slot offset. or symbol offset, which determines the starting point of the slot or symbol relative to a reference time domain position. Among them, the reference time domain position is at least one of the slot where the PO is located, the first slot of the cycle, the specified slot, etc.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗在PTW内或PTW外不同,包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the measurement window is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, including at least one of the following:
在所述PTW内,所述测量窗的周期与PTW或寻呼paging的周期相关;Within the PTW, the period of the measurement window is related to the period of the PTW or paging;
在所述PTW外,所述测量窗的配置信息为默认的配置信息;Outside the PTW, the configuration information of the measurement window is default configuration information;
在所述PTW内,所述测量窗的起始slot与paging的时域位置相关;Within the PTW, the starting slot of the measurement window is related to the time domain position of paging;
在所述PTW外,所述测量窗的周期上不测量和/或处理所述定位参考信号。Outside the PTW, the positioning reference signal is not measured and/or processed over the period of the measurement window.
比如测量窗在PTW内,测量窗的周期可以为第一终端专属DRX周期、RAN寻呼周期、默认寻呼周期中的最小值,或者为所述PTW或者paging的周期,测量窗在PTW外,测量窗的周期可以为RAN eDRX的周期或CNeDRX的周期。For example, if the measurement window is within the PTW, the period of the measurement window may be the minimum value among the first terminal-specific DRX cycle, the RAN paging cycle, and the default paging cycle, or it may be the cycle of the PTW or paging, and the measurement window is outside the PTW. The period of the measurement window can be the period of RAN eDRX or the period of CNeDRX.
在所述PTW内,所述测量窗的起始slot与paging的时域位置相关,比如,所述测量窗的起始slot避免与paging的时域位置冲突,位于所述paging之后若干slot。Within the PTW, the starting slot of the measurement window is related to the time domain position of paging. For example, the starting slot of the measurement window avoids conflict with the time domain position of paging and is located several slots after the paging.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗的配置信息包括第一配置信息和第二配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于PTW内的定位参考信号的测量和/或处理,所述第二配置信息用于所述PTW外的定位参考信号的测量和/或处理。In some embodiments, the configuration information of the measurement window includes first configuration information and second configuration information. The first configuration information is used for measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals within the PTW. The second configuration information For measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals outside the PTW.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗的配置信息包括第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于PTW内的定位参考信号的测量和/或处理,当所述测量窗位于PTW外时,所述PTW被丢弃,即在所述周期不执行的定位参考信号的测量和/或处理。当所述测量窗包括部分位于PTW外,可选的所述PTW被丢弃,即在所述周期不执行的定位参考信号的测量和/或处理,或者当所述测量窗包括部分位于PTW外,可选的所述或者当所述测量窗包括部分位于PTW外,可选的,在位于PTW内的部分的时域位置上执行的定位参考信号的测量和/ 或处理。In some embodiments, the configuration information of the measurement window includes first configuration information, and the first configuration information is used for measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals within the PTW. When the measurement window is located outside the PTW, the The PTW is discarded, ie no measurement and/or processing of the positioning reference signal is performed during the period. When the measurement window includes a portion located outside the PTW, optionally the PTW is discarded, that is, no measurement and/or processing of the positioning reference signal is performed during the period, or when the measurement window includes a portion located outside the PTW, Optionally, or when the measurement window includes a portion located outside the PTW, optionally, the measurement of the positioning reference signal is performed on the time domain position of the portion located within the PTW and/or or processing.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗位于PTW内的情况下,满足以下至少一项:In some embodiments, when the measurement window is located within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
所述测量窗不与所述PO位置重叠;The measurement window does not overlap with the PO position;
所述测量窗位于所述PO位置之后;The measurement window is located behind the PO position;
当所述测量窗包括所述PO位置时,丢弃drop掉所述测量窗的定位参考信号测量和/或处理,在所述PO位置执行paging;When the measurement window includes the PO position, discard the positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing that dropped the measurement window, and perform paging at the PO position;
当所述测量窗包括所述PO位置时,drop掉所述测量窗内与PO位置重叠的定位参考信号测量和/或处理,在所述PO位置执行paging;When the measurement window includes the PO position, drop the positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing that overlaps with the PO position in the measurement window, and perform paging at the PO position;
当所述测量窗包括所述PO位置时,执行定位参考信号测量和/或处理;When the measurement window includes the PO position, perform positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing;
其中,所述PTW包括以下至少之一:Wherein, the PTW includes at least one of the following:
所述CN eDRX指示的PTW位置The PTW location indicated by the CN eDRX
所述RAN eDRX指示的PTW位置The PTW location indicated by the RAN eDRX
所述第一终端最终确定的PTW位置。The PTW position finally determined by the first terminal.
上述的实施例用于指示当所述测量窗与PO冲突时,所述第一终端的行为。The above embodiment is used to indicate the behavior of the first terminal when the measurement window conflicts with the PO.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗位于PTW内的情况下,满足以下至少一项:In some embodiments, when the measurement window is located within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
所述测量窗不与所述SSB位置重叠;The measurement window does not overlap with the SSB position;
所述测量窗位于所述SSB位置之后;The measurement window is located behind the SSB position;
当所述测量窗包括所述SSB位置时,丢弃drop掉所述测量窗的定位参考信号测量和/或处理;When the measurement window includes the SSB position, discard the positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing that drops the measurement window;
当所述测量窗包括所述SSB置时,drop掉所述测量窗内与SSB位置重叠的定位参考信号测量和/或处理;When the measurement window includes the SSB position, drop the positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing that overlaps with the SSB position in the measurement window;
当所述测量窗包括所述SSB位置时,执行定位参考信号测量和/或处理;performing positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing when the measurement window includes the SSB position;
其中,所述SSB包括以下至少之一:Wherein, the SSB includes at least one of the following:
所述第一终端的服务小区的SSBThe SSB of the serving cell of the first terminal
所述第一终端的驻扎的小区的SSBThe SSB of the cell where the first terminal is stationed
所述第一终端用于做RRM测量的SSBThe SSB used by the first terminal for RRM measurement
所述第一终端用于听MIB的SSB。The first terminal is used to listen to the SSB of the MIB.
一些实施例中,在所述第一通信设备为基站的情况下,所述方法还包括:In some embodiments, when the first communication device is a base station, the method further includes:
所述第一通信设备与LMF或至少一个邻小区交互以下至少一项:The first communication device interacts with the LMF or at least one neighboring cell at least one of the following:
所述邻小区默认的DRX配置信息;The default DRX configuration information of the neighboring cell;
所述邻小区默认的eDRX配置信息;The default eDRX configuration information of the neighboring cell;
所述邻小区默认的paging配置信息。The default paging configuration information of the neighboring cell.
一些实施例中,所述方法还包括:In some embodiments, the method further includes:
所述第一通信设备向LMF或至少一个邻小区交互以下至少一项:The first communication device interacts with at least one of the following to the LMF or at least one neighboring cell:
第一信息; first information;
目标信息。target information.
这样可以根据邻小区的配置信息合理地对终端进行配置,避免资源冲突。In this way, the terminal can be reasonably configured according to the configuration information of neighboring cells to avoid resource conflicts.
一些实施例中,所述终端的定位参考信号的配置信息包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the configuration information of the positioning reference signal of the terminal includes at least one of the following:
SRS的序列标识,以使SRS在RNA区域或者Tracking area或者预先规定的区域内有效,SRS的序列标识与5G-S-TMSI,UE_ID_H(13bit的hashed ID)相关;在一个可选的实施例中,包括一个或多个SRS,所述序列标识用于识别所述一个或多个SRS;可选的,所述序列标识用于在指定的区域内识别所述一个或多个SRS;所述指定的区域,可以是指定的定位区域,小区列表范围内,Tracking area范围内,注册区域,或当前小区The sequence identifier of the SRS, so that the SRS is valid in the RNA area or Tracking area or a predetermined area, the sequence identifier of the SRS is related to 5G-S-TMSI, UE_ID_H (13-bit hashed ID); in an optional embodiment , including one or more SRS, the sequence identifier is used to identify the one or more SRS; optionally, the sequence identifier is used to identify the one or more SRS in a designated area; the designated The area can be a specified positioning area, within the cell list range, within the Tracking area range, the registration area, or the current cell
SRS的周期,在一个可选的实施例中,所述SRS的长度为N2个ms或者M2个slot,或L2个帧长,可选的N2,M2,L2可以取10,20,40,60,80,128,256,512等至少之一,可选的,SRS周期可以配置到20480,40960ms。在一个可选的实施例,所述SRS的周期可以配置在SRS配置信息中。在一个可选的实施例,所述SRS的周期为根据协议或者约定确定的,如在PTW外等于eDRX的周期,在PTW内,等于paging的周期;The period of SRS. In an optional embodiment, the length of the SRS is N2 ms or M2 slots, or L2 frame length. Optional N2, M2, and L2 can be 10, 20, 40, 60 , at least one of 80, 128, 256, 512, etc., optionally, the SRS period can be configured to 20480, 40960ms. In an optional embodiment, the SRS period may be configured in SRS configuration information. In an optional embodiment, the period of the SRS is determined according to the protocol or agreement, such as equal to the period of eDRX outside the PTW, and equal to the period of paging within the PTW;
SRS的时域位置,包括SRS的超帧号,帧号SFN,时隙位置slot offset等,可以用于确定SRS的起始位置;在一个可选的实施例中,所述SRS的超帧号可以根据PTW的超帧号获取,又比如,所述SRS的超帧号,帧号SFN,时隙位置slot offset等可以配置在SRS配置信息中,又比如所述SRS的位置为相对于paging的相对位置。所述SRS的时域位置还包括SRS的终止位置。The time domain position of the SRS, including the superframe number of the SRS, the frame number SFN, the slot position slot offset, etc., can be used to determine the starting position of the SRS; in an optional embodiment, the superframe number of the SRS It can be obtained according to the superframe number of the PTW. For example, the superframe number, frame number SFN, slot position, slot offset, etc. of the SRS can be configured in the SRS configuration information. For example, the position of the SRS is relative to paging. relative position. The time domain position of the SRS also includes the termination position of the SRS.
定位参考信号的配置信息还可以包括以下至少一项:SRS集合(set)ID、SRS资源(Resource)ID、SRS符号数、带宽部分(BWP)ID、空间关系信息、SRS发送功率参数(比如P0,alpha,路损参考信号)、Comb数、SRS时域位置、SRS频域位置、SRS muting指示信息、SRS跳频指示信息。The configuration information of the positioning reference signal may also include at least one of the following: SRS set ID, SRS resource ID, SRS symbol number, bandwidth part (BWP) ID, spatial relationship information, SRS transmit power parameter (such as P0 , alpha, path loss reference signal), Comb number, SRS time domain position, SRS frequency domain position, SRS muting indication information, SRS frequency hopping indication information.
一些实施例中,所述定位参考信号的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联,包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
所述定位参考信号与所述第一终端的标识信息存在关联关系,比如SRS发送的位置根据第一终端的标识信息计算得到;在一个可选的实施例中,所述SRS发送的位置为根据第一终端的标识信息,和/或时域偏移指示信息K3确定。The positioning reference signal is associated with the identification information of the first terminal. For example, the position sent by the SRS is calculated based on the identification information of the first terminal. In an optional embodiment, the position sent by the SRS is calculated based on The identification information of the first terminal and/or the time domain offset indication information K3 are determined.
所述定位参考信号的周期与PTW的周期相关,比如SRS发送的位置是相对于PTW的起始位置的;在一个可选的实施例中,所述SRS的周期为PTW的周期。在另一个可选的实施例中,所述SRS的周期在PTW内或PTW外的周期不同。在又一个可选的实施例中,所述某一周期的SRS位于PTW外,则所述周期的SRS被丢弃,并不执行所述定位参考信号的测量或处理。The period of the positioning reference signal is related to the period of the PTW. For example, the position sent by the SRS is relative to the starting position of the PTW; in an optional embodiment, the period of the SRS is the period of the PTW. In another optional embodiment, the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW. In yet another optional embodiment, if the SRS of a certain period is located outside the PTW, the SRS of the period is discarded, and the measurement or processing of the positioning reference signal is not performed.
所述定位参考信号的的超帧与所述PTW的超帧相关,在一个可选的实施例中,所述定位参考信号的超帧与所述PTW的超帧相同;The superframe of the positioning reference signal is related to the superframe of the PTW. In an optional embodiment, the superframe of the positioning reference signal is the same as the superframe of the PTW;
所述定位参考信号的起始slot与寻呼机会PO和/或寻呼帧PF相关,在一个可选的实 施例中,帧位置与PF相同,但帧内偏移不同,帧内偏移S0与PO有关,或,S0为常数,如位于PO后S0个slot;在另一个可选的实施例中,所述定位参考信号的周期的帧位置为:SFN mode T=K3,K3与T/N有关,或,K3为常数,或者所述定位参考信号的周期的帧位置为:slot number mode T=S0,K1与T/N有关,或,K3为常数;The starting slot of the positioning reference signal is related to the paging opportunity PO and/or the paging frame PF. In an optional implementation In the embodiment, the frame position is the same as PF, but the intra-frame offset is different. The intra-frame offset S0 is related to PO, or S0 is a constant, such as located S0 slots after PO; in another optional embodiment, The periodic frame position of the positioning reference signal is: SFN mode T=K3, K3 is related to T/N, or K3 is a constant, or the periodic frame position of the positioning reference signal is: slot number mode T=S0 , K1 is related to T/N, or K3 is a constant;
其中,所述PTW包括以下至少一项:Wherein, the PTW includes at least one of the following:
所述CN eDRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by the CN eDRX;
所述RAN eDRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by the RAN eDRX;
所述终端最终确定的PTW位置。The terminal's final determined PTW position.
其中,在确定定位参考信号时,可以通过指示帧偏移,相对于PF的偏移来确定定位参考信号;在确定定位参考信号的所在的时隙或符号偏移时,可以通过指示时隙偏移或符号偏移,确定相对于参考时域位置所在的时隙或符号起点。其中,参考时域位置为PO所处的slot,周期的第一个slot,指定的slot等至少一个。When determining the positioning reference signal, the positioning reference signal can be determined by indicating the frame offset and the offset relative to the PF; when determining the time slot or symbol offset of the positioning reference signal, the positioning reference signal can be determined by indicating the time slot offset. Shift or symbol offset to determine the starting point of the time slot or symbol relative to the reference time domain position. Among them, the reference time domain position is at least one of the slot where the PO is located, the first slot of the cycle, the specified slot, etc.
一些实施例中,所述SRS的周期在PTW内或PTW外不同,和/或,SRS的周期内时域偏移在PTW内或PTW外不同。In some embodiments, the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, and/or, the time domain offset within the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW.
一些实施例中,所述SRS的周期位于PTW内的情况下,满足以下至少一项:In some embodiments, when the period of the SRS is within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
所述SRS的周期为配置的第一周期;The period of the SRS is the configured first period;
所述SRS的周期与PTW的周期相关;The period of the SRS is related to the period of the PTW;
所述SRS的周期与第一周期和paging的周期相关;The cycle of the SRS is related to the first cycle and the cycle of paging;
所述SRS的周期与paging的周期相关。The SRS cycle is related to the paging cycle.
比如SRS在PTW内,如图7所示,SRS周期可以为第一终端专属DRX周期、RAN寻呼周期和默认寻呼周期中的最小值;或者,SRS周期为配置的SRS周期;或者,SRS周期为配置的SRS周期和寻呼周期中的最小值;或者,SRS周期为寻呼周期的1/N,如,寻呼周期为128ms,SRS周期为1ms,4ms,8ms…64ms等,这样在一个寻呼周期或PTW内有多个SRS周期,一旦有部分SRS被丢弃(drop)(如被SSB或者RO等drop),也有其它周期SRS发送,从而不会在整个大的eDRX周期下,没有实际的SRS发送。For example, if the SRS is within the PTW, as shown in Figure 7, the SRS cycle can be the minimum value among the first terminal-specific DRX cycle, the RAN paging cycle and the default paging cycle; or, the SRS cycle can be the configured SRS cycle; or, the SRS cycle The cycle is the minimum value between the configured SRS cycle and the paging cycle; or the SRS cycle is 1/N of the paging cycle, for example, the paging cycle is 128ms, the SRS cycle is 1ms, 4ms, 8ms...64ms, etc., so that in There are multiple SRS cycles within a paging cycle or PTW. Once part of the SRS is dropped (such as dropped by SSB or RO, etc.), there will also be SRS sent in other cycles, so there will be no transmission in the entire large eDRX cycle. The actual SRS is sent.
本申请实施例中,一个association周期可以包括多个SRS周期,一个寻呼周期或PTW内可以包括一个或多个association周期。In this embodiment of the present application, one association cycle may include multiple SRS cycles, and one paging cycle or PTW may include one or more association cycles.
一些实施例中,所述SRS的周期位于PTW外的情况下,所述SRS的周期满足以下至少一项:In some embodiments, when the period of the SRS is outside the PTW, the period of the SRS satisfies at least one of the following:
与RAN eDRX周期相关;Related to the RAN eDRX cycle;
与CN eDRX周期相关;Related to CN eDRX cycle;
所述SRS的周期为配置的第一周期的K倍,K为整数;The period of the SRS is K times the configured first period, and K is an integer;
所述SRS的周期为配置的第二周期。The SRS cycle is the configured second cycle.
如图7所示,在SRS在PTW外时,SRS周期T为CN eDRX周期,或者,可以为RAN eDRX周期。 As shown in Figure 7, when the SRS is outside the PTW, the SRS period T is the CN eDRX period, or may be the RAN eDRX period.
一些实施例中,所述SRS的序列标识与所述第一终端的标识信息存在关联关系,所述关联关系满足以下至少一项:In some embodiments, there is an association relationship between the sequence identifier of the SRS and the identification information of the first terminal, and the association relationship satisfies at least one of the following:
根据所述第一终端的临时身份标识5G-S-TMSI的后10位或后16位或前10位或前16位确定所述SRS的序列标识;Determine the sequence identifier of the SRS according to the last 10 digits or the last 16 digits or the first 10 digits or the first 16 digits of the first terminal's temporary identity identifier 5G-S-TMSI;
根据所述第一终端的哈希计算值Hashed ID确定所述SRS的序列标识,进一步的,用于生成所述SRS的序列group u为所述SRS序列ID的函数。The sequence identifier of the SRS is determined according to the hash calculation value Hashed ID of the first terminal. Further, the sequence group u used to generate the SRS is a function of the SRS sequence ID.
一些实施例中,第一终端处于inactive态时,若配置了小于10.24s的RRC_IDLE eDRX,未配置RRC_INACTIVE eDRX,SRS的周期T为RAN寻呼周期和idle eDRX周期中的最小值。In some embodiments, when the first terminal is in the inactive state, if RRC_IDLE eDRX of less than 10.24s is configured and RRC_INACTIVE eDRX is not configured, the SRS period T is the minimum value of the RAN paging period and the idle eDRX period.
第一终端处于inactive态时,若配置了小于或等于10.24s的RRC_IDLE eDRX,配置了小于或等于10.24s的RRC_INACTIVE eDRX,SRS的周期T为inactive eDRX周期和idle eDRX周期中的最小值。When the first terminal is in the inactive state, if the RRC_IDLE eDRX of less than or equal to 10.24s is configured, and the RRC_INACTIVE eDRX of less than or equal to 10.24s is configured, the SRS period T is the minimum value of the inactive eDRX period and the idle eDRX period.
第一终端处于inactive态时,若配置了大于10.24s的RRC_IDLE eDRX,未配置RRC_INACTIVE eDRX,SRS的周期位于PTW内的情况下,SRS的周期T为第一终端专属DRX周期、RAN寻呼周期和默认寻呼周期中的最小值;SRS的周期位于PTW外的情况下,SRS的周期T为RAN寻呼周期。When the first terminal is in the inactive state, if RRC_IDLE eDRX greater than 10.24s is configured, RRC_INACTIVE eDRX is not configured, and the SRS cycle is within the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the first terminal exclusive DRX cycle, RAN paging cycle and The minimum value in the default paging cycle; when the SRS cycle is outside the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the RAN paging cycle.
第一终端处于inactive态时,若配置了大于10.24s的RRC_IDLE eDRX,配置了小于或等于10.24s的RRC_INACTIVE eDRX,SRS的周期位于PTW内的情况下,SRS的周期T为第一终端专属DRX周期、inactive eDRX周期和默认寻呼周期中的最小值;SRS的周期位于PTW外的情况下,SRS的周期T为inactive eDRX周期。When the first terminal is in the inactive state, if RRC_IDLE eDRX greater than 10.24s is configured, and RRC_INACTIVE eDRX less than or equal to 10.24s is configured, and the SRS cycle is within the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the first terminal exclusive DRX cycle. , the minimum value of the inactive eDRX cycle and the default paging cycle; when the SRS cycle is outside the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the inactive eDRX cycle.
第一终端处于inactive态时,若配置了大于10.24s的RRC_IDLE eDRX,配置了大于10.24s的RRC_INACTIVE eDRX,SRS的周期位于PTW内的情况下,SRS的周期T为第一终端专属DRX周期、inactive eDRX周期和默认寻呼周期中的最小值;SRS的周期位于PTW外的情况下,SRS的周期T为inactive eDRX周期和idle eDRX周期中的最小值,或者,SRS的周期T为inactive eDRX周期。When the first terminal is in the inactive state, if the RRC_IDLE eDRX greater than 10.24s is configured, and the RRC_INACTIVE eDRX greater than 10.24s is configured, and the SRS cycle is within the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the first terminal's exclusive DRX cycle, inactive The minimum value of the eDRX cycle and the default paging cycle; when the SRS cycle is outside the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the minimum value of the inactive eDRX cycle and the idle eDRX cycle, or the SRS cycle T is the inactive eDRX cycle.
第一终端处于idle时,在idle eDRX周期小于或等于10.24s的情况下,SRS的周期T为idle eDRX周期;在idle eDRX周期大于10.24s且位于PTW内的情况下,SRS的周期T为第一终端专属DRX周期和默认寻呼周期中的最小值。When the first terminal is idle, and the idle eDRX cycle is less than or equal to 10.24s, the SRS cycle T is the idle eDRX cycle; when the idle eDRX cycle is greater than 10.24s and is located within the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the idle eDRX cycle. The minimum value of a terminal-specific DRX cycle and the default paging cycle.
本申请实施例还提供了一种扩展非连续接收的配置方法,如图8所示,包括:The embodiment of the present application also provides a configuration method for extended discontinuous reception, as shown in Figure 8, including:
步骤201:第二通信设备发送第一终端的第一信息,所述第一信息用于第一通信设备确定所述第一终端在多个非连续接收DRX配置下的目标信息;Step 201: The second communication device sends the first information of the first terminal, the first information is used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:The target information includes at least one of the following:
目标DRX配置信息;Target DRX configuration information;
定位参考信号SRS的信息;Positioning reference signal SRS information;
用于测量和/或处理定位参考信号的测量窗的信息; Information on the measurement window used to measure and/or process the positioning reference signal;
其中第一信息包括以下至少一项:The first information includes at least one of the following:
所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX的配置信息;Configuration information of at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
所述第一终端的标识信息;The identification information of the first terminal;
所述第一终端的寻呼paging的时频位置或周期信息。The time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
一些实施例中,所述多个DRX包括以下至少两项:In some embodiments, the plurality of DRXs include at least two of the following:
核心网CN扩展非连续接收eDRX;Core network CN extends discontinuous reception eDRX;
CN DRX;CN DRX;
默认的无线接入网RAN paging;Default radio access network RAN paging;
默认的DRX;Default DRX;
默认的eDRX;Default eDRX;
UE专属的DRX;UE exclusive DRX;
UE专属的eDRX;UE-specific eDRX;
大于10.24s的RAN eDRX;RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s;
小于10.24s的RAN eDRX。RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
一些实施例中,所述第二通信设备发送第一终端的第一信息包括:In some embodiments, the second communication device sending the first information of the first terminal includes:
所述第一终端发送所述第一信息;或The first terminal sends the first information; or
认证管理功能AMF发送所述第一信息。The authentication management function AMF sends the first information.
一些实施例中,所述第一终端发送的所述第一信息包含于所述第一终端上报的第一辅助信息中。In some embodiments, the first information sent by the first terminal is included in the first auxiliary information reported by the first terminal.
一些实施例中,所述第一辅助信息还包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the first auxiliary information further includes at least one of the following:
所述第一终端倾向的无线资源控制RRC状态;The radio resource control RRC state preferred by the first terminal;
定位的优先级;Positioning priority;
CN eDRX使能信息或大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的使能信息;CN eDRX enabling information or RAN eDRX enabling information greater than 10.24s;
所述第一终端倾向的大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的配置信息;The RAN eDRX configuration information preferred by the first terminal is greater than 10.24s;
所述第一终端倾向的目标信息的配置区域的信息;Information about the configuration area of the target information preferred by the first terminal;
所述CN eDRX或CN DRX的配置区域的信息。Information about the configuration area of the CN eDRX or CN DRX.
一些实施例中,在所述第一通信设备为基站的情况下,所述第一信息携带在RRC消息中;或In some embodiments, when the first communication device is a base station, the first information is carried in an RRC message; or
在所述第一通信设备为位置管理功能LMF的情况下,所述第一信息携带在长期演进定位协议LPP消息中。In the case where the first communication device is a location management function LMF, the first information is carried in a Long Term Evolution Positioning Protocol LPP message.
一些实施例中,在所述第一终端处于RRC非激活态或空闲态时,所述第一辅助信息携带在小数据传输SDT中。In some embodiments, when the first terminal is in the RRC inactive state or idle state, the first auxiliary information is carried in the small data transmission SDT.
一些实施例中,在所述第一通信设备为基站的情况下,AMF发送的所述第一信息携带在以下至少一项中:注册请求;服务请求;切换请求;N2消息;N2消息的激活消息;定位寻呼原因;N2挂起响应消息。 In some embodiments, when the first communication device is a base station, the first information sent by the AMF is carried in at least one of the following: registration request; service request; handover request; N2 message; activation of N2 message Message; location paging reason; N2 hangup response message.
一些实施例中,在所述第一通信设备为LMF的情况下,AMF发送的所述第一信息携带在以下至少一项中:In some embodiments, when the first communication device is an LMF, the first information sent by the AMF is carried in at least one of the following:
所述AMF发送的位置服务请求;The location service request sent by the AMF;
Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation消息。Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation message.
一些实施例中,所述第一信息还包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the first information further includes at least one of the following:
CN eDRX使能信息或大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的使能信息;CN eDRX enabling information or RAN eDRX enabling information greater than 10.24s;
目标信息的配置区域的信息。Information about the configuration area of the target information.
一些实施例中,目标信息的配置区域的信息包括以下至少一项:小区列表;Tracking area标识;注册区域;RNA标识;区域标识;当前小区。In some embodiments, the information of the configuration area of the target information includes at least one of the following: cell list; Tracking area identifier; registration area; RNA identifier; area identifier; current cell.
一些实施例中,第二通信设备发送第一终端的第一信息之前,所述方法还包括:In some embodiments, before the second communication device sends the first information of the first terminal, the method further includes:
所述第二通信设备接收所述第一通信设备的请求信息,指示所述第二通信设备反馈所述第一信息。The second communication device receives the request information from the first communication device and instructs the second communication device to feed back the first information.
一些实施例中,第二通信设备发送第一终端的第一信息之后,所述方法还包括:In some embodiments, after the second communication device sends the first information of the first terminal, the method further includes:
所述第二通信设备接收所述第一通信设备的响应信息,所述响应信息包括所述目标信息。The second communication device receives response information from the first communication device, where the response information includes the target information.
一些实施例中,所述多个DRX包括eDRX时,所述eDRX的配置信息包括以下至少一项:eDRX的周期;寻呼时间窗口PTW的长度;PTW的起始位置;In some embodiments, when the plurality of DRXs include eDRX, the configuration information of the eDRX includes at least one of the following: the period of eDRX; the length of the paging time window PTW; and the starting position of the PTW;
其中,所述eDRX包括以下至少一项:目标eDRX;终端倾向的目标eDRX;CN eDRX;默认的eDRX;UE专属的eDRX;大于10.24s的RAN eDRX;小于10.24s的RAN eDRX。Wherein, the eDRX includes at least one of the following: target eDRX; terminal-preferred target eDRX; CN eDRX; default eDRX; UE-specific eDRX; RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s; RAN eDRX less than 10.24s.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗的信息包括以下至少一项:所述测量窗的预配置标识;所述测量窗的时域位置;所述测量窗的长度;所述测量窗的周期。In some embodiments, the information of the measurement window includes at least one of the following: a preconfigured identification of the measurement window; a time domain position of the measurement window; a length of the measurement window; and a period of the measurement window.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联。In some embodiments, the configuration information of the measurement window is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联,包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the configuration information of the measurement window is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
所述测量窗与终端的标识信息存在关联关系;The measurement window is associated with the identification information of the terminal;
所述测量窗的周期与PTW的周期相关;The period of the measurement window is related to the period of the PTW;
所述测量窗的超帧与所述PTW的超帧相关;The superframe of the measurement window is related to the superframe of the PTW;
所述测量窗的起始slot与寻呼机会PO和/或寻呼帧PF相关;The starting slot of the measurement window is related to the paging opportunity PO and/or the paging frame PF;
其中,所述PTW包括以下至少一项:Wherein, the PTW includes at least one of the following:
所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
所述目标DRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by the target DRX;
所述终端最终确定的PTW位置。The terminal's final determined PTW position.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗在PTW内或PTW外不同,包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the measurement window is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, including at least one of the following:
在所述PTW内,所述测量窗的周期与PTW或寻呼paging的周期相关; Within the PTW, the period of the measurement window is related to the period of the PTW or paging;
在所述PTW外,所述测量窗的配置信息为默认的配置信息;Outside the PTW, the configuration information of the measurement window is default configuration information;
在所述PTW内,所述测量窗的起始slot与paging的时域位置相关;Within the PTW, the starting slot of the measurement window is related to the time domain position of paging;
在所述PTW外,所述测量窗的周期上不测量和/或处理所述定位参考信号。Outside the PTW, the positioning reference signal is not measured and/or processed over the period of the measurement window.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗的配置信息包括第一配置信息和第二配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于PTW内的定位参考信号的测量和/或处理,所述第二配置信息用于所述PTW外的定位参考信号的测量和/或处理。In some embodiments, the configuration information of the measurement window includes first configuration information and second configuration information. The first configuration information is used for measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals within the PTW. The second configuration information For measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals outside the PTW.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗位于PTW内的情况下,满足以下至少一项:In some embodiments, when the measurement window is located within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
所述测量窗不与所述PO位置重叠;The measurement window does not overlap with the PO position;
所述测量窗位于所述PO位置之后;The measurement window is located behind the PO position;
当所述测量窗包括所述PO位置时,丢弃drop掉所述测量窗的定位参考信号测量和/或处理,在所述PO位置执行paging;When the measurement window includes the PO position, discard the positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing that dropped the measurement window, and perform paging at the PO position;
当所述测量窗包括所述PO位置时,drop掉所述测量窗内与PO位置重叠的定位参考信号测量和/或处理,在所述PO位置执行paging;When the measurement window includes the PO position, drop the positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing that overlaps with the PO position in the measurement window, and perform paging at the PO position;
当所述测量窗包括所述PO位置时,执行定位参考信号测量和/或处理;When the measurement window includes the PO position, perform positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing;
其中,所述PTW包括以下至少之一:Wherein, the PTW includes at least one of the following:
所述CN eDRX指示的PTW位置The PTW location indicated by the CN eDRX
所述RAN eDRX指示的PTW位置The PTW location indicated by the RAN eDRX
所述第一终端最终确定的PTW位置。The PTW position finally determined by the first terminal.
一些实施例中,所述终端的定位参考信号的配置信息包括以下至少一项:SRS的序列标识;SRS的周期;SRS的时域位置。In some embodiments, the configuration information of the positioning reference signal of the terminal includes at least one of the following: a sequence identifier of the SRS; a period of the SRS; and a time domain position of the SRS.
一些实施例中,所述定位参考信号的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联。In some embodiments, the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs.
一些实施例中,所述定位参考信号的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联,包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
所述定位参考信号与所述第一终端的标识信息存在关联关系;The positioning reference signal is associated with the identification information of the first terminal;
所述定位参考信号的周期与PTW的周期相关;The period of the positioning reference signal is related to the period of the PTW;
所述定位参考信号的的超帧与所述PTW的超帧相关;The superframe of the positioning reference signal is related to the superframe of the PTW;
所述定位参考信号的起始slot与寻呼机会PO/或寻呼帧PF相关;The starting slot of the positioning reference signal is related to the paging opportunity PO/or the paging frame PF;
其中,所述PTW包括以下至少一项:Wherein, the PTW includes at least one of the following:
所述CN eDRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by the CN eDRX;
所述RAN eDRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by the RAN eDRX;
所述终端最终确定的PTW位置。The terminal's final determined PTW position.
一些实施例中,所述SRS的周期在PTW内或PTW外不同,和/或,SRS的周期内时域偏移在PTW内或PTW外不同。In some embodiments, the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, and/or, the time domain offset within the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW.
一些实施例中,所述SRS的周期位于PTW内的情况下,满足以下至少一项: In some embodiments, when the period of the SRS is within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
所述SRS的周期为配置的第一周期;The period of the SRS is the configured first period;
所述SRS的周期与PTW的周期相关;The period of the SRS is related to the period of the PTW;
所述SRS的周期与第一周期和paging的周期相关;The cycle of the SRS is related to the first cycle and the cycle of paging;
所述SRS的周期与paging的周期相关。The SRS cycle is related to the paging cycle.
一些实施例中,所述SRS的周期位于PTW外的情况下,所述SRS的周期满足以下至少一项:In some embodiments, when the period of the SRS is outside the PTW, the period of the SRS satisfies at least one of the following:
与RAN eDRX周期相关;Related to the RAN eDRX cycle;
与CN eDRX周期相关;Related to CN eDRX cycle;
所述SRS的周期为配置的第一周期的K倍,K为整数;The period of the SRS is K times the configured first period, and K is an integer;
所述SRS的周期为配置的第二周期。The SRS cycle is the configured second cycle.
一些实施例中,所述SRS的序列标识与所述第一终端的标识信息存在关联关系,所述关联关系满足以下至少一项:In some embodiments, there is an association relationship between the sequence identifier of the SRS and the identification information of the first terminal, and the association relationship satisfies at least one of the following:
根据所述第一终端的临时身份标识5G-S-TMSI的后10位或后16位或前10位或前16位确定所述SRS的序列标识;Determine the sequence identifier of the SRS according to the last 10 digits or the last 16 digits or the first 10 digits or the first 16 digits of the first terminal's temporary identity identifier 5G-S-TMSI;
根据所述第一终端的哈希计算值Hashed ID确定所述SRS的序列标识。The sequence identifier of the SRS is determined according to the hash calculation value Hashed ID of the first terminal.
一些实施例中,所述第二通信设备为终端,在所述SRS的发送slot或符号与其它上行数据碰撞(碰撞包括与上行数据符号和/或slot重叠,或者,与所述上行数据的符号间隔小于Ngap个符号)的情况下,所述方法还包括:In some embodiments, the second communication device is a terminal, and the sending slot or symbol of the SRS collides with other uplink data (collision includes overlapping with uplink data symbols and/or slots, or, with symbols of the uplink data In the case where the interval is less than Ngap symbols), the method also includes:
根据SRS周期或SRS优先级,确定是否不传输SRS,包括以下任一项:Determine whether to not transmit SRS based on the SRS cycle or SRS priority, including any of the following:
若位于PTW内,SRS周期数小于第一阈值,则传输所述SRS,挂起所述上行数据;If it is within the PTW and the number of SRS cycles is less than the first threshold, the SRS is transmitted and the uplink data is suspended;
若位于PTW内,SRS周期数大于第二阈值,则不传输所述SRS,传输所述上行数据;If it is within the PTW and the number of SRS cycles is greater than the second threshold, the SRS is not transmitted and the uplink data is transmitted;
若SRS优先级大于第一优先级等级,则传输所述SRS,挂起所述上行数据;If the SRS priority is greater than the first priority level, transmit the SRS and suspend the uplink data;
若SRS优先级小于第二优先级等级,则不传输所述SRS,传输所述上行数据。If the SRS priority is lower than the second priority level, the SRS is not transmitted and the uplink data is transmitted.
一些实施例中,所述第二通信设备为终端,在所述SRS的发送slot或符号与其它下行数据碰撞(碰撞包括与下行数据符号和/或slot重叠,或者,与所述下行数据的符号间隔小于Ngap个符号)的情况下,所述方法还包括:In some embodiments, the second communication device is a terminal, and the sending slot or symbol of the SRS collides with other downlink data (collision includes overlapping with downlink data symbols and/or slots, or, with symbols of the downlink data In the case where the interval is less than Ngap symbols), the method also includes:
根据SRS周期或SRS优先级,确定是否不传输SRS,包括以下任一项:Determine whether to not transmit SRS based on the SRS cycle or SRS priority, including any of the following:
若位于PTW内,SRS周期数小于第一阈值,则传输所述SRS,挂起所述下行数据;If it is within the PTW and the number of SRS cycles is less than the first threshold, the SRS is transmitted and the downlink data is suspended;
若位于PTW内,SRS周期数大于第二阈值,则不传输所述SRS,传输所述下行数据;If it is within the PTW and the number of SRS cycles is greater than the second threshold, the SRS is not transmitted and the downlink data is transmitted;
若SRS优先级大于第一优先级等级,则传输所述SRS,挂起所述下行数据;If the SRS priority is greater than the first priority level, transmit the SRS and suspend the downlink data;
若SRS优先级小于第二优先级等级,则不传输所述SRS,传输所述下行数据。If the SRS priority is lower than the second priority level, the SRS is not transmitted and the downlink data is transmitted.
其中,第一阈值、第二阈值、第一优先级等级、第二优先级等级可以是网络侧设备配置或预配置或协议定义的。The first threshold, the second threshold, the first priority level, and the second priority level may be network side device configuration or preconfiguration or protocol definition.
一些实施例中,所述方法还包括:In some embodiments, the method further includes:
在PTW内未发送完预定周期数的SRS的情况下,延长所述PTW以完成所述预定周 期数的SRS的发送。If the SRS for the predetermined number of cycles has not been sent within the PTW, extend the PTW to complete the predetermined number of cycles. SRS of issue is sent.
一实施例中,如图9a所示,可以丢弃位于PTW外的SRS;另一实施例中,如图9b所示,SRS被PO drop导致SRS被丢弃;又一实施例中,如图9c所示,PTW结束前,若未完成预定周期数(如一个周期)的SRS发送(包括未使得SRS周期位于PTW内,或者部分SRS被drop导致SRS未实际发送),所述SRS在PTW结束后的时间T内可以继续周期性发送,直到发完预定周期数的SRS为止。In one embodiment, as shown in Figure 9a, the SRS located outside the PTW can be dropped; in another embodiment, as shown in Figure 9b, the SRS is PO dropped, causing the SRS to be dropped; in yet another embodiment, as shown in Figure 9c indicates that before the end of PTW, if the SRS transmission for a predetermined number of cycles (such as one cycle) has not been completed (including the SRS cycle not being within the PTW, or part of the SRS being dropped resulting in the SRS not being actually sent), the SRS will be sent after the end of the PTW. Periodic sending can continue within time T until the SRS for the predetermined number of cycles is sent.
一些实施例中,第一终端处于inactive态时,若配置了小于10.24s的RRC_IDLE eDRX,未配置RRC_INACTIVE eDRX,SRS的周期T为RAN寻呼周期和idle eDRX周期中的最小值。In some embodiments, when the first terminal is in the inactive state, if RRC_IDLE eDRX of less than 10.24s is configured and RRC_INACTIVE eDRX is not configured, the SRS period T is the minimum value of the RAN paging period and the idle eDRX period.
第一终端处于inactive态时,若配置了小于或等于10.24s的RRC_IDLE eDRX,配置了小于或等于10.24s的RRC_INACTIVE eDRX,SRS的周期T为inactive eDRX周期和idle eDRX周期中的最小值。When the first terminal is in the inactive state, if the RRC_IDLE eDRX of less than or equal to 10.24s is configured, and the RRC_INACTIVE eDRX of less than or equal to 10.24s is configured, the SRS period T is the minimum value of the inactive eDRX period and the idle eDRX period.
第一终端处于inactive态时,若配置了大于10.24s的RRC_IDLE eDRX,未配置RRC_INACTIVE eDRX,SRS的周期位于PTW内的情况下,SRS的周期T为第一终端专属DRX周期、RAN寻呼周期和默认寻呼周期中的最小值;SRS的周期位于PTW外的情况下,SRS的周期T为RAN寻呼周期。When the first terminal is in the inactive state, if RRC_IDLE eDRX greater than 10.24s is configured, RRC_INACTIVE eDRX is not configured, and the SRS cycle is within the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the first terminal exclusive DRX cycle, RAN paging cycle and The minimum value in the default paging cycle; when the SRS cycle is outside the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the RAN paging cycle.
第一终端处于inactive态时,若配置了大于10.24s的RRC_IDLE eDRX,配置了小于或等于10.24s的RRC_INACTIVE eDRX,SRS的周期位于PTW内的情况下,SRS的周期T为第一终端专属DRX周期、inactive eDRX周期和默认寻呼周期中的最小值;SRS的周期位于PTW外的情况下,SRS的周期T为inactive eDRX周期。When the first terminal is in the inactive state, if RRC_IDLE eDRX greater than 10.24s is configured, and RRC_INACTIVE eDRX less than or equal to 10.24s is configured, and the SRS cycle is within the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the first terminal exclusive DRX cycle. , the minimum value of the inactive eDRX cycle and the default paging cycle; when the SRS cycle is outside the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the inactive eDRX cycle.
第一终端处于inactive态时,若配置了大于10.24s的RRC_IDLE eDRX,配置了大于10.24s的RRC_INACTIVE eDRX,SRS的周期位于PTW内的情况下,SRS的周期T为第一终端专属DRX周期、inactive eDRX周期和默认寻呼周期中的最小值;SRS的周期位于PTW外的情况下,SRS的周期T为inactive eDRX周期和idle eDRX周期中的最小值,或者,SRS的周期T为inactive eDRX周期。When the first terminal is in the inactive state, if the RRC_IDLE eDRX greater than 10.24s is configured, and the RRC_INACTIVE eDRX greater than 10.24s is configured, and the SRS cycle is within the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the first terminal's exclusive DRX cycle, inactive The minimum value of the eDRX cycle and the default paging cycle; when the SRS cycle is outside the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the minimum value of the inactive eDRX cycle and the idle eDRX cycle, or the SRS cycle T is the inactive eDRX cycle.
第一终端处于idle时,在idle eDRX周期小于或等于10.24s的情况下,SRS的周期T为idle eDRX周期;在idle eDRX周期大于10.24s且位于PTW内的情况下,SRS的周期T为第一终端专属DRX周期和默认寻呼周期中的最小值。When the first terminal is idle, and the idle eDRX cycle is less than or equal to 10.24s, the SRS cycle T is the idle eDRX cycle; when the idle eDRX cycle is greater than 10.24s and is located within the PTW, the SRS cycle T is the idle eDRX cycle. The minimum value of a terminal-specific DRX cycle and the default paging cycle.
本申请实施例提供的扩展非连续接收的配置方法,执行主体可以为扩展非连续接收的配置装置。本申请实施例中以扩展非连续接收的配置装置执行扩展非连续接收的配置方法为例,说明本申请实施例提供的扩展非连续接收的配置装置。For the extended discontinuous reception configuration method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the execution subject may be an extended discontinuous reception configuration device. In the embodiment of the present application, the extended discontinuous reception configuration device performing the extended discontinuous reception configuration method is used as an example to illustrate the extended discontinuous reception configuration device provided by the embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例提供一种扩展非连续接收的配置装置,应用于第一通信设备,包括:An embodiment of the present application provides an extended discontinuous reception configuration device, applied to a first communication device, including:
获取模块,用于获取第一终端的第一信息,所述第一信息用于所述第一通信设备确定所述第一终端在多个非连续接收DRX配置下的目标信息;An acquisition module, configured to acquire the first information of the first terminal, the first information being used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
所述目标信息包括以下至少一项: The target information includes at least one of the following:
目标DRX配置信息;Target DRX configuration information;
定位参考信号SRS的信息;Positioning reference signal SRS information;
用于测量和/或处理定位参考信号的测量窗的信息;Information on the measurement window used to measure and/or process the positioning reference signal;
其中第一信息包括以下至少一项:The first information includes at least one of the following:
所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX的配置信息;Configuration information of at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
所述第一终端的标识信息;The identification information of the first terminal;
所述第一终端的寻呼paging的时频位置或周期信息。The time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
在本申请实施例中,第一通信设备获取第一终端的第一信息,第一通信设备能够根据第一信息确定第一终端在多个DRX配置下的目标信息,能够合理地对终端进行配置,使得SRS的配置与CN eDRX的配置信息匹配,保证第一终端的省电以及定位功能。In this embodiment of the present application, the first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, the first communication device can determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple DRX configurations based on the first information, and can reasonably configure the terminal. , so that the configuration of SRS matches the configuration information of CN eDRX, ensuring the power saving and positioning functions of the first terminal.
一些实施例中,所述多个DRX包括以下至少两项:In some embodiments, the plurality of DRXs include at least two of the following:
核心网CN扩展非连续接收eDRX;Core network CN extends discontinuous reception eDRX;
CN DRX;CN DRX;
默认的无线接入网RAN paging;Default radio access network RAN paging;
默认的DRX;Default DRX;
默认的eDRX;Default eDRX;
UE专属的DRX;UE exclusive DRX;
UE专属的eDRX;UE-specific eDRX;
大于10.24s的RAN eDRX;RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s;
小于10.24s的RAN eDRX。RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
一些实施例中,所述获取模块用于从所述第一终端获取所述第一信息;或In some embodiments, the acquisition module is used to acquire the first information from the first terminal; or
从认证管理功能AMF获取所述第一信息。The first information is obtained from the authentication management function AMF.
一些实施例中,所述第一通信设备从所述第一终端获取的所述第一信息包含于所述第一终端上报的第一辅助信息中。In some embodiments, the first information obtained by the first communication device from the first terminal is included in the first auxiliary information reported by the first terminal.
一些实施例中,所述第一辅助信息还包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the first auxiliary information further includes at least one of the following:
所述第一终端倾向的无线资源控制RRC状态;The radio resource control RRC state preferred by the first terminal;
所述第一终端倾向的目标DRX的配置信息;Configuration information of the target DRX preferred by the first terminal;
定位的优先级;Positioning priority;
CN eDRX使能信息或大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的使能信息;CN eDRX enabling information or RAN eDRX enabling information greater than 10.24s;
所述第一终端倾向的大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的配置信息;The RAN eDRX configuration information preferred by the first terminal is greater than 10.24s;
所述第一终端倾向的目标信息的配置区域的信息;Information about the configuration area of the target information preferred by the first terminal;
所述CN eDRX或CN DRX的配置区域的信息。Information about the configuration area of the CN eDRX or CN DRX.
一些实施例中,In some embodiments,
在所述第一通信设备为基站的情况下,所述第一信息携带在RRC消息中;或When the first communication device is a base station, the first information is carried in an RRC message; or
在所述第一通信设备为位置管理功能LMF的情况下,所述第一信息携带在长期演进 定位协议LPP消息中。In the case where the first communication device is the location management function LMF, the first information is carried in the long-term evolution in the Positioning Protocol LPP message.
一些实施例中,在所述第一终端处于RRC非激活态或空闲态时,所述第一辅助信息携带在小数据传输SDT中。In some embodiments, when the first terminal is in the RRC inactive state or idle state, the first auxiliary information is carried in the small data transmission SDT.
一些实施例中,在所述第一通信设备为基站的情况下,所述第一通信设备从AMF获取的所述第一信息携带在以下至少一项中:注册请求;服务请求;切换请求;N2消息;N2消息的激活消息;定位寻呼原因;N2挂起响应消息。In some embodiments, when the first communication device is a base station, the first information obtained by the first communication device from the AMF is carried in at least one of the following: a registration request; a service request; a handover request; N2 message; N2 message activation message; location paging reason; N2 hangup response message.
一些实施例中,在所述第一通信设备为LMF的情况下,所述第一通信设备从AMF获取的所述第一信息携带在以下至少一项中:In some embodiments, when the first communication device is an LMF, the first information obtained by the first communication device from the AMF is carried in at least one of the following:
所述AMF发送的位置服务请求;The location service request sent by the AMF;
Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation消息。Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation message.
一些实施例中,所述第一信息还包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the first information further includes at least one of the following:
CN eDRX使能信息或大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的使能信息;CN eDRX enabling information or RAN eDRX enabling information greater than 10.24s;
目标信息的配置区域的信息。Information about the configuration area of the target information.
一些实施例中,所述装置还包括:In some embodiments, the device further includes:
推荐模块,用于推荐所述终端的第一目标信息给基站,以使所述基站结合所述第一目标信息确定配置给终端的目标信息。A recommendation module, configured to recommend the first target information of the terminal to the base station, so that the base station determines the target information configured for the terminal in combination with the first target information.
一些实施例中,目标信息的配置区域的信息包括以下至少一项:小区列表;Tracking area标识;注册区域;RNA标识;区域标识;当前小区。In some embodiments, the information of the configuration area of the target information includes at least one of the following: cell list; Tracking area identifier; registration area; RNA identifier; area identifier; current cell.
一些实施例中,所述装置还包括:In some embodiments, the device further includes:
请求信息发送模块,用于向所述第一终端或AMF发送请求信息,指示所述第一终端或AMF反馈所述第一信息。A request information sending module is configured to send request information to the first terminal or AMF, instructing the first terminal or AMF to feed back the first information.
一些实施例中,所述装置还包括:In some embodiments, the device further includes:
响应信息发送模块,用于向所述第一终端或AMF发送响应信息,所述响应信息包括所述目标信息。A response information sending module, configured to send response information to the first terminal or AMF, where the response information includes the target information.
一些实施例中,触发所述第一通信设备获取所述第一信息或者确定所述目标信息的触发事件包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the triggering event that triggers the first communication device to obtain the first information or determine the target information includes at least one of the following:
定位服务请求;Location service request;
网络侧设备准备在RRC释放release消息中配置所述目标信息;The network side device prepares to configure the target information in the RRC release message;
终端倾向进入eDRX并保留定位服务;Terminals tend to enter eDRX and retain positioning services;
AMF接收到延迟终端终止定位请求MT-LR、MT-LR和终端始发定位请求MO-LR中的至少一项;The AMF receives at least one of the delayed terminal terminated positioning request MT-LR, MT-LR and the terminal originated positioning request MO-LR;
AMF收到位于CN eDRX或大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的终端的位置服务请求;AMF receives a location service request from a terminal located at CN eDRX or RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s;
终端收到用于指示低功率low power的指示信息;The terminal receives indication information indicating low power;
AMF收到包括指示为低功率low power的位置服务请求。AMF receives a location service request that includes an indication of low power.
一些实施例中,所述多个DRX包括eDRX时,所述eDRX的配置信息包括以下至少 一项:eDRX的周期;寻呼时间窗口PTW的长度;PTW的起始位置;In some embodiments, when the plurality of DRXs include eDRX, the configuration information of the eDRX includes at least the following: One item: the period of eDRX; the length of the paging time window PTW; the starting position of the PTW;
其中,所述eDRX包括以下至少一项:目标eDRX;终端倾向的目标eDRX;CN eDRX;默认的eDRX;UE专属的eDRX;大于10.24s的RAN eDRX;小于10.24s的RAN eDRX。Wherein, the eDRX includes at least one of the following: target eDRX; terminal-preferred target eDRX; CN eDRX; default eDRX; UE-specific eDRX; RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s; RAN eDRX less than 10.24s.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗的信息包括以下至少一项:所述测量窗的预配置标识;所述测量窗的时域位置;所述测量窗的长度;所述测量窗的周期。In some embodiments, the information of the measurement window includes at least one of the following: a preconfigured identification of the measurement window; a time domain position of the measurement window; a length of the measurement window; and a period of the measurement window.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联。In some embodiments, the configuration information of the measurement window is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联,包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the configuration information of the measurement window is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
所述测量窗与终端的标识信息存在关联关系;The measurement window is associated with the identification information of the terminal;
所述测量窗的周期与PTW的周期相关;The period of the measurement window is related to the period of the PTW;
所述测量窗的超帧与所述PTW的超帧相关;The superframe of the measurement window is related to the superframe of the PTW;
所述测量窗的起始slot与寻呼机会PO和/或寻呼帧PF相关;The starting slot of the measurement window is related to the paging opportunity PO and/or the paging frame PF;
其中,所述PTW包括以下至少一项:Wherein, the PTW includes at least one of the following:
所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
所述目标DRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by the target DRX;
所述终端最终确定的PTW位置。The terminal's final determined PTW position.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗在PTW内或PTW外不同,包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the measurement window is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, including at least one of the following:
在所述PTW内,所述测量窗的周期与PTW或寻呼paging的周期相关;Within the PTW, the period of the measurement window is related to the period of the PTW or paging;
在所述PTW外,所述测量窗的配置信息为默认的配置信息;Outside the PTW, the configuration information of the measurement window is default configuration information;
在所述PTW内,所述测量窗的起始slot与paging的时域位置相关;Within the PTW, the starting slot of the measurement window is related to the time domain position of paging;
在所述PTW外,所述测量窗的周期上不测量和/或处理所述定位参考信号。Outside the PTW, the positioning reference signal is not measured and/or processed over the period of the measurement window.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗的配置信息包括第一配置信息和第二配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于PTW内的定位参考信号的测量和/或处理,所述第二配置信息用于所述PTW外的定位参考信号的测量和/或处理。In some embodiments, the configuration information of the measurement window includes first configuration information and second configuration information. The first configuration information is used for measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals within the PTW. The second configuration information For measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals outside the PTW.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗位于PTW内的情况下,满足以下至少一项:In some embodiments, when the measurement window is located within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
所述测量窗不与所述PO位置重叠;The measurement window does not overlap with the PO position;
所述测量窗位于所述PO位置之后;The measurement window is located behind the PO position;
当所述测量窗包括所述PO位置时,丢弃drop掉所述测量窗的定位参考信号测量和/或处理,在所述PO位置执行paging;When the measurement window includes the PO position, discard the positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing that dropped the measurement window, and perform paging at the PO position;
当所述测量窗包括所述PO位置时,drop掉所述测量窗内与PO位置重叠的定位参考信号测量和/或处理,在所述PO位置执行paging;When the measurement window includes the PO position, drop the positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing that overlaps with the PO position in the measurement window, and perform paging at the PO position;
当所述测量窗包括所述PO位置时,执行定位参考信号测量和/或处理;When the measurement window includes the PO position, perform positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing;
其中,所述PTW包括以下至少之一:Wherein, the PTW includes at least one of the following:
所述CN eDRX指示的PTW位置 The CN eDRX indicates the PTW location
所述RAN eDRX指示的PTW位置The PTW location indicated by the RAN eDRX
所述第一终端最终确定的PTW位置。The PTW position finally determined by the first terminal.
一些实施例中,在所述第一通信设备为基站的情况下,所述装置还包括:In some embodiments, when the first communication device is a base station, the apparatus further includes:
交互模块,用于与LMF或至少一个邻小区交互以下至少一项:The interaction module is used to interact with at least one of the following with the LMF or at least one neighboring cell:
所述邻小区默认的DRX配置信息;The default DRX configuration information of the neighboring cell;
所述邻小区默认的eDRX配置信息;The default eDRX configuration information of the neighboring cell;
所述邻小区默认的paging配置信息。The default paging configuration information of the neighboring cell.
一些实施例中,所述终端的定位参考信号的配置信息包括以下至少一项:SRS的序列标识;SRS的周期;SRS的时域位置。In some embodiments, the configuration information of the positioning reference signal of the terminal includes at least one of the following: a sequence identifier of the SRS; a period of the SRS; and a time domain position of the SRS.
一些实施例中,所述定位参考信号的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联。In some embodiments, the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs.
一些实施例中,所述定位参考信号的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联,包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
所述定位参考信号与所述第一终端的标识信息存在关联关系;The positioning reference signal is associated with the identification information of the first terminal;
所述定位参考信号的周期与PTW的周期相关;The period of the positioning reference signal is related to the period of the PTW;
所述定位参考信号的的超帧与所述PTW的超帧相关;所述定位参考信号的起始slot与寻呼机会PO和/或寻呼帧PF相关;The superframe of the positioning reference signal is related to the superframe of the PTW; the starting slot of the positioning reference signal is related to the paging opportunity PO and/or the paging frame PF;
其中,所述PTW包括以下至少一项:Wherein, the PTW includes at least one of the following:
所述CN eDRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by the CN eDRX;
所述RAN eDRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by the RAN eDRX;
所述终端最终确定的PTW位置。The terminal's final determined PTW position.
一些实施例中,所述SRS的周期在PTW内或PTW外不同,和/或,SRS的周期内时域偏移在PTW内或PTW外不同。In some embodiments, the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, and/or, the time domain offset within the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW.
一些实施例中,所述SRS的周期位于PTW内的情况下,满足以下至少一项:In some embodiments, when the period of the SRS is within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
所述SRS的周期为配置的第一周期;The period of the SRS is the configured first period;
所述SRS的周期与PTW的周期相关;The period of the SRS is related to the period of the PTW;
所述SRS的周期与第一周期和paging的周期相关;The cycle of the SRS is related to the first cycle and the cycle of paging;
所述SRS的周期与paging的周期相关。The SRS cycle is related to the paging cycle.
一些实施例中,所述SRS的周期位于PTW外的情况下,所述SRS的周期满足以下至少一项:In some embodiments, when the period of the SRS is outside the PTW, the period of the SRS satisfies at least one of the following:
与RAN eDRX周期相关;Related to the RAN eDRX cycle;
与CN eDRX周期相关;Related to CN eDRX cycle;
所述SRS的周期为配置的第一周期的K倍,K为整数;The period of the SRS is K times the configured first period, and K is an integer;
所述SRS的周期为配置的第二周期。The SRS cycle is the configured second cycle.
一些实施例中,所述SRS的序列标识与所述第一终端的标识信息存在关联关系,所 述关联关系满足以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the sequence identifier of the SRS is associated with the identification information of the first terminal, so The above-mentioned association relationship satisfies at least one of the following:
根据所述第一终端的临时身份标识5G-S-TMSI的后10位或后16位或前10位或前16位确定所述SRS的序列标识;Determine the sequence identifier of the SRS according to the last 10 digits or the last 16 digits or the first 10 digits or the first 16 digits of the first terminal's temporary identity identifier 5G-S-TMSI;
根据所述第一终端的哈希计算值Hashed ID确定所述SRS的序列标识。The sequence identifier of the SRS is determined according to the hash calculation value Hashed ID of the first terminal.
本申请实施例还提供了一种扩展非连续接收的配置装置,应用于第二通信设备,包括:The embodiment of the present application also provides a configuration device for extended discontinuous reception, which is applied to the second communication device, including:
发送模块,用于发送第一终端的第一信息,所述第一信息用于第一通信设备确定所述第一终端在多个非连续接收DRX配置下的目标信息;A sending module, configured to send the first information of the first terminal, the first information being used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:The target information includes at least one of the following:
目标DRX配置信息;Target DRX configuration information;
定位参考信号SRS的信息;Positioning reference signal SRS information;
用于测量和/或处理定位参考信号的测量窗的信息;Information on the measurement window used to measure and/or process the positioning reference signal;
其中第一信息包括以下至少一项:The first information includes at least one of the following:
所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX的配置信息;Configuration information of at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
所述第一终端的标识信息;The identification information of the first terminal;
所述第一终端的寻呼paging的时频位置或周期信息。The time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
一些实施例中,所述多个DRX包括以下至少两项:In some embodiments, the plurality of DRXs include at least two of the following:
核心网CN扩展非连续接收eDRX;Core network CN extends discontinuous reception eDRX;
CN DRX;CN DRX;
默认的无线接入网RAN paging;Default radio access network RAN paging;
默认的DRX;Default DRX;
默认的eDRX;Default eDRX;
UE专属的DRX;UE exclusive DRX;
UE专属的eDRX;UE-specific eDRX;
大于10.24s的RAN eDRX;RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s;
小于10.24s的RAN eDRX。RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
一些实施例中,所述第一终端发送所述第一信息;或In some embodiments, the first terminal sends the first information; or
认证管理功能AMF发送所述第一信息。The authentication management function AMF sends the first information.
一些实施例中,所述第一终端发送的所述第一信息包含于所述第一终端上报的第一辅助信息中。In some embodiments, the first information sent by the first terminal is included in the first auxiliary information reported by the first terminal.
一些实施例中,所述第一辅助信息还包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the first auxiliary information further includes at least one of the following:
所述第一终端倾向的无线资源控制RRC状态;The radio resource control RRC state preferred by the first terminal;
定位的优先级;Positioning priority;
CN eDRX使能信息或大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的使能信息;CN eDRX enabling information or RAN eDRX enabling information greater than 10.24s;
所述第一终端倾向的大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的配置信息;The RAN eDRX configuration information preferred by the first terminal is greater than 10.24s;
所述第一终端倾向的目标信息的配置区域的信息; Information about the configuration area of the target information preferred by the first terminal;
所述CN eDRX或CN DRX的配置区域的信息。Information about the configuration area of the CN eDRX or CN DRX.
一些实施例中,在所述第一通信设备为基站的情况下,所述第一信息携带在RRC消息中;或In some embodiments, when the first communication device is a base station, the first information is carried in an RRC message; or
在所述第一通信设备为位置管理功能LMF的情况下,所述第一信息携带在长期演进定位协议LPP消息中。In the case where the first communication device is a location management function LMF, the first information is carried in a Long Term Evolution Positioning Protocol LPP message.
一些实施例中,在所述第一终端处于RRC非激活态或空闲态时,所述第一辅助信息携带在小数据传输SDT中。In some embodiments, when the first terminal is in the RRC inactive state or idle state, the first auxiliary information is carried in the small data transmission SDT.
一些实施例中,在所述第一通信设备为基站的情况下,AMF发送的所述第一信息携带在以下至少一项中:In some embodiments, when the first communication device is a base station, the first information sent by the AMF is carried in at least one of the following:
注册请求;Registration request;
服务请求;Request for service;
切换请求;Switch request;
N2消息;N2 message;
N2消息的激活消息;Activation message of N2 message;
定位寻呼原因;Location paging reason;
N2挂起响应消息。N2 hangs response message.
一些实施例中,在所述第一通信设备为LMF的情况下,AMF发送的所述第一信息携带在以下至少一项中:In some embodiments, when the first communication device is an LMF, the first information sent by the AMF is carried in at least one of the following:
所述AMF发送的位置服务请求;The location service request sent by the AMF;
Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation消息。Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation message.
一些实施例中,所述第一信息还包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the first information further includes at least one of the following:
CN eDRX使能信息或大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的使能信息;CN eDRX enabling information or RAN eDRX enabling information greater than 10.24s;
目标信息的配置区域的信息。Information about the configuration area of the target information.
一些实施例中,目标信息的配置区域的信息包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the information in the configuration area of the target information includes at least one of the following:
小区列表;Community list;
Tracking area标识;Tracking area logo;
注册区域;registration area;
RNA标识;RNA identification;
区域标识;area identification;
当前小区。Current neighborhood.
一些实施例中,所述装置还包括:In some embodiments, the device further includes:
接收模块,用于接收所述第一通信设备的请求信息,指示所述第二通信设备反馈所述第一信息。A receiving module, configured to receive request information from the first communication device and instruct the second communication device to feed back the first information.
一些实施例中,所述装置还包括:In some embodiments, the device further includes:
接收模块,用于接收所述第一通信设备的响应信息,所述响应信息包括所述目标信息。 A receiving module, configured to receive response information from the first communication device, where the response information includes the target information.
一些实施例中,所述多个DRX包括eDRX时,所述eDRX的配置信息包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, when the plurality of DRXs include eDRX, the configuration information of the eDRX includes at least one of the following:
eDRX的周期;eDRX cycle;
寻呼时间窗口PTW的长度;The length of the paging time window PTW;
PTW的起始位置;The starting position of PTW;
其中,所述eDRX包括以下至少一项:Wherein, the eDRX includes at least one of the following:
目标eDRX;target eDRX;
终端倾向的目标eDRX;Terminal-inclined target eDRX;
CN eDRX;CN eDRX;
默认的eDRX;Default eDRX;
UE专属的eDRX;UE-specific eDRX;
大于10.24s的RAN eDRX;RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s;
小于10.24s的RAN eDRX。RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗的信息包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the measurement window information includes at least one of the following:
所述测量窗的预配置标识;The preconfigured identification of the measurement window;
所述测量窗的时域位置;The time domain position of the measurement window;
所述测量窗的长度;The length of the measurement window;
所述测量窗的周期。The period of the measurement window.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联。In some embodiments, the configuration information of the measurement window is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联,包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the configuration information of the measurement window is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
所述测量窗与终端的标识信息存在关联关系;The measurement window is associated with the identification information of the terminal;
所述测量窗的周期与PTW的周期相关;The period of the measurement window is related to the period of the PTW;
所述测量窗的超帧与所述PTW的超帧相关;The superframe of the measurement window is related to the superframe of the PTW;
所述测量窗的起始slot与寻呼机会PO和/或寻呼帧PF相关;The starting slot of the measurement window is related to the paging opportunity PO and/or the paging frame PF;
其中,所述PTW包括以下至少一项:Wherein, the PTW includes at least one of the following:
所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
所述目标DRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by the target DRX;
所述终端最终确定的PTW位置。The terminal's final determined PTW position.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗在PTW内或PTW外不同,包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the measurement window is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, including at least one of the following:
在所述PTW内,所述测量窗的周期与PTW或寻呼paging的周期相关;Within the PTW, the period of the measurement window is related to the period of the PTW or paging;
在所述PTW外,所述测量窗的配置信息为默认的配置信息;Outside the PTW, the configuration information of the measurement window is default configuration information;
在所述PTW内,所述测量窗的起始slot与paging的时域位置相关;Within the PTW, the starting slot of the measurement window is related to the time domain position of paging;
在所述PTW外,所述测量窗的周期上不测量和/或处理所述定位参考信号。 Outside the PTW, the positioning reference signal is not measured and/or processed over the period of the measurement window.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗的配置信息包括第一配置信息和第二配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于PTW内的定位参考信号的测量和/或处理,所述第二配置信息用于所述PTW外的定位参考信号的测量和/或处理。In some embodiments, the configuration information of the measurement window includes first configuration information and second configuration information. The first configuration information is used for measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals within the PTW. The second configuration information For measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals outside the PTW.
一些实施例中,所述测量窗位于PTW内的情况下,满足以下至少一项:In some embodiments, when the measurement window is located within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
所述测量窗不与所述PO位置重叠;The measurement window does not overlap with the PO position;
所述测量窗位于所述PO位置之后;The measurement window is located behind the PO position;
当所述测量窗包括所述PO位置时,丢弃drop掉所述测量窗的定位参考信号测量和/或处理,在所述PO位置执行paging;When the measurement window includes the PO position, discard the positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing that dropped the measurement window, and perform paging at the PO position;
当所述测量窗包括所述PO位置时,drop掉所述测量窗内与PO位置重叠的定位参考信号测量和/或处理,在所述PO位置执行paging;When the measurement window includes the PO position, drop the positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing that overlaps with the PO position in the measurement window, and perform paging at the PO position;
当所述测量窗包括所述PO位置时,执行定位参考信号测量和/或处理;When the measurement window includes the PO position, perform positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing;
其中,所述PTW包括以下至少之一:Wherein, the PTW includes at least one of the following:
所述CN eDRX指示的PTW位置The PTW location indicated by the CN eDRX
所述RAN eDRX指示的PTW位置The PTW location indicated by the RAN eDRX
所述第一终端最终确定的PTW位置。The PTW position finally determined by the first terminal.
一些实施例中,所述终端的定位参考信号的配置信息包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the configuration information of the positioning reference signal of the terminal includes at least one of the following:
SRS的序列标识;Sequence identifier of SRS;
SRS的周期;SRS cycle;
SRS的时域位置。Time domain position of SRS.
一些实施例中,所述定位参考信号的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联。In some embodiments, the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs.
一些实施例中,所述定位参考信号的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联,包括以下至少一项:In some embodiments, the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is associated with the configuration information of the multiple DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
所述定位参考信号与所述第一终端的标识信息存在关联关系;The positioning reference signal is associated with the identification information of the first terminal;
所述定位参考信号的周期与PTW的周期相关;The period of the positioning reference signal is related to the period of the PTW;
所述定位参考信号的的超帧与所述PTW的超帧相关;The superframe of the positioning reference signal is related to the superframe of the PTW;
所述定位参考信号的起始slot与寻呼机会PO/或寻呼帧PF相关;The starting slot of the positioning reference signal is related to the paging opportunity PO/or the paging frame PF;
其中,所述PTW包括以下至少一项:Wherein, the PTW includes at least one of the following:
所述CN eDRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by the CN eDRX;
所述RAN eDRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by the RAN eDRX;
所述终端最终确定的PTW位置。The terminal's final determined PTW position.
一些实施例中,所述SRS的周期在PTW内或PTW外不同,和/或,SRS的周期内时域偏移在PTW内或PTW外不同。In some embodiments, the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, and/or, the time domain offset within the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW.
一些实施例中,所述SRS的周期位于PTW内的情况下,满足以下至少一项:In some embodiments, when the period of the SRS is within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
所述SRS的周期为配置的第一周期; The period of the SRS is the configured first period;
所述SRS的周期与PTW的周期相关;The period of the SRS is related to the period of the PTW;
所述SRS的周期与第一周期和paging的周期相关;The cycle of the SRS is related to the first cycle and the cycle of paging;
所述SRS的周期与paging的周期相关。The SRS cycle is related to the paging cycle.
一些实施例中,所述SRS的周期位于PTW外的情况下,所述SRS的周期满足以下至少一项:In some embodiments, when the period of the SRS is outside the PTW, the period of the SRS satisfies at least one of the following:
与RAN eDRX周期相关;Related to the RAN eDRX cycle;
与CN eDRX周期相关;Related to CN eDRX cycle;
所述SRS的周期为配置的第一周期的K倍,K为整数;The period of the SRS is K times the configured first period, and K is an integer;
所述SRS的周期为配置的第二周期。The SRS cycle is the configured second cycle.
一些实施例中,所述SRS的序列标识与所述第一终端的标识信息存在关联关系,所述关联关系满足以下至少一项:In some embodiments, there is an association relationship between the sequence identifier of the SRS and the identification information of the first terminal, and the association relationship satisfies at least one of the following:
根据所述第一终端的临时身份标识5G-S-TMSI的后10位或后16位或前10位或前16位确定所述SRS的序列标识;Determine the sequence identifier of the SRS according to the last 10 digits or the last 16 digits or the first 10 digits or the first 16 digits of the first terminal's temporary identity identifier 5G-S-TMSI;
根据所述第一终端的哈希计算值Hashed ID确定所述SRS的序列标识。The sequence identifier of the SRS is determined according to the hash calculation value Hashed ID of the first terminal.
一些实施例中,所述第二通信设备为终端,在所述SRS的发送slot或符号与其它上下行数据碰撞的情况下,所述装置还包括:In some embodiments, the second communication device is a terminal, and in the case where the transmission slot or symbol of the SRS collides with other uplink and downlink data, the device further includes:
处理模块,用于根据SRS周期或SRS优先级,确定是否不传输SRS,包括以下任一项:A processing module used to determine whether to transmit SRS based on the SRS cycle or SRS priority, including any of the following:
若位于PTW内,SRS周期数小于第一阈值,则传输所述SRS,挂起所述上下行数据;If it is within the PTW and the number of SRS cycles is less than the first threshold, the SRS is transmitted and the uplink and downlink data are suspended;
若位于PTW内,SRS周期数大于第二阈值,则不传输所述SRS,传输所述上下行数据;If it is within the PTW and the number of SRS cycles is greater than the second threshold, the SRS is not transmitted and the uplink and downlink data are transmitted;
若SRS优先级大于第一优先级等级,则传输所述SRS,挂起所述上下行数据;If the SRS priority is greater than the first priority level, transmit the SRS and suspend the uplink and downlink data;
若SRS优先级小于第二优先级等级,则不传输所述SRS,传输所述上下行数据。If the SRS priority is lower than the second priority level, the SRS is not transmitted and the uplink and downlink data are transmitted.
一些实施例中,所述装置还包括:In some embodiments, the device further includes:
延迟模块,用于在PTW内未发送完预定周期数的SRS的情况下,延长所述PTW以完成所述预定周期数的SRS的发送。A delay module, configured to extend the PTW to complete the sending of the SRS for the predetermined number of cycles when the SRS for the predetermined number of cycles has not been sent within the PTW.
本申请实施例中的扩展非连续接收的配置装置可以是电子设备,例如具有操作系统的电子设备,也可以是电子设备中的部件,例如集成电路或芯片。该电子设备可以是终端,也可以为除终端之外的其他设备。示例性的,终端可以包括但不限于上述所列举的终端11的类型,其他设备可以为服务器、网络附属存储器(Network Attached Storage,NAS)等,本申请实施例不作具体限定。The extended discontinuous reception configuration device in the embodiment of the present application may be an electronic device, such as an electronic device with an operating system, or may be a component in the electronic device, such as an integrated circuit or chip. The electronic device may be a terminal or other devices other than the terminal. For example, terminals may include but are not limited to the types of terminals 11 listed above, and other devices may be servers, network attached storage (Network Attached Storage, NAS), etc., which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of this application.
本申请实施例提供的扩展非连续接收的配置装置能够实现图4至图10的方法实施例实现的各个过程,并达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。The extended discontinuous reception configuration device provided by the embodiments of the present application can implement each process implemented by the method embodiments of Figures 4 to 10, and achieve the same technical effect. To avoid duplication, the details will not be described here.
可选的,如图11所示,本申请实施例还提供一种通信设备600,包括处理器601和存储器602,存储器602上存储有可在所述处理器601上运行的程序或指令,例如,该通信 设备600为第一通信设备时,该程序或指令被处理器601执行时实现上述扩展非连续接收的配置方法实施例的各个步骤,且能达到相同的技术效果。该通信设备600为第二通信设备时,该程序或指令被处理器601执行时实现上述扩展非连续接收的配置方法实施例的各个步骤,且能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。Optionally, as shown in Figure 11, this embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device 600, which includes a processor 601 and a memory 602. The memory 602 stores programs or instructions that can be run on the processor 601, for example. , the communication When the device 600 is a first communication device, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor 601, each step of the above extended discontinuous reception configuration method embodiment is implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved. When the communication device 600 is a second communication device, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor 601, each step of the above embodiment of the configuration method for extended discontinuous reception is implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved. To avoid duplication, the steps are not included here. Again.
本申请实施例还提供了一种第一通信设备,该第一通信设备包括处理器和存储器,所述存储器存储可在所述处理器上运行的程序或指令,所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现如上所述的扩展非连续接收的配置方法的步骤。An embodiment of the present application also provides a first communication device. The first communication device includes a processor and a memory. The memory stores programs or instructions that can be run on the processor. The program or instructions are processed by the processor. When executed by the processor, the steps of implementing the configuration method for extended discontinuous reception as described above are implemented.
本申请实施例还提供了一种第一通信设备,包括处理器及通信接口,其中,所述通信接口用于获取第一终端的第一信息,所述第一信息用于所述第一通信设备确定所述第一终端在多个非连续接收DRX配置下的目标信息;An embodiment of the present application also provides a first communication device, including a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface is used to obtain first information of the first terminal, and the first information is used for the first communication The device determines the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:The target information includes at least one of the following:
目标DRX配置信息;Target DRX configuration information;
定位参考信号SRS的信息;Positioning reference signal SRS information;
用于测量和/或处理定位参考信号的测量窗的信息;Information on the measurement window used to measure and/or process the positioning reference signal;
其中第一信息包括以下至少一项:The first information includes at least one of the following:
所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX的配置信息;Configuration information of at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
所述第一终端的标识信息;The identification information of the first terminal;
所述第一终端的寻呼paging的时频位置或周期信息。The time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
本申请实施例还提供了一种第二通信设备,该第二通信设备包括处理器和存储器,所述存储器存储可在所述处理器上运行的程序或指令,所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现如上所述的扩展非连续接收的配置方法的步骤。An embodiment of the present application also provides a second communication device. The second communication device includes a processor and a memory. The memory stores programs or instructions that can be run on the processor. The program or instructions are processed by the processor. When executed by the processor, the steps of implementing the configuration method for extended discontinuous reception as described above are implemented.
本申请实施例还提供了一种第二通信设备,包括处理器及通信接口,其中,所述通信接口用于发送第一终端的第一信息,所述第一信息用于第一通信设备确定所述第一终端在多个非连续接收DRX配置下的目标信息;An embodiment of the present application also provides a second communication device, including a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface is used to send first information of the first terminal, and the first information is used by the first communication device to determine The first terminal receives target information under multiple discontinuous DRX configurations;
所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:The target information includes at least one of the following:
目标DRX配置信息;Target DRX configuration information;
定位参考信号SRS的信息;Positioning reference signal SRS information;
用于测量和/或处理定位参考信号的测量窗的信息;Information on the measurement window used to measure and/or process the positioning reference signal;
其中第一信息包括以下至少一项:The first information includes at least one of the following:
所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX的配置信息;Configuration information of at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
所述第一终端的标识信息;The identification information of the first terminal;
所述第一终端的寻呼paging的时频位置或周期信息。The time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
上述第一通信设备可以为网络侧设备或LMF,第二通信设备可以为AMF或终端。The above-mentioned first communication device may be a network side device or an LMF, and the second communication device may be an AMF or a terminal.
当第二通信设备为终端时,本申请实施例还提供一种终端,包括处理器和通信接口,该终端实施例与上述终端侧方法实施例对应,上述方法实施例的各个实施过程和实现方式 均可适用于该终端实施例中,且能达到相同的技术效果。具体地,图11为实现本申请实施例的一种终端的硬件结构示意图。When the second communication device is a terminal, an embodiment of the present application also provides a terminal, including a processor and a communication interface. The terminal embodiment corresponds to the above-mentioned terminal-side method embodiment, and the various implementation processes and implementation methods of the above-mentioned method embodiment All can be applied to the terminal embodiment and can achieve the same technical effect. Specifically, FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a terminal that implements an embodiment of the present application.
该终端700包括但不限于:射频单元701、网络模块702、音频输出单元703、输入单元704、传感器705、显示单元706、用户输入单元707、接口单元708、存储器709以及处理器710等中的至少部分部件。The terminal 700 includes but is not limited to: a radio frequency unit 701, a network module 702, an audio output unit 703, an input unit 704, a sensor 705, a display unit 706, a user input unit 707, an interface unit 708, a memory 709, a processor 710, etc. At least some parts.
本领域技术人员可以理解,终端700还可以包括给各个部件供电的电源(比如电池),电源可以通过电源管理系统与处理器710逻辑相连,从而通过电源管理系统实现管理充电、放电、以及功耗管理等功能。图11中示出的终端结构并不构成对终端的限定,终端可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者不同的部件布置,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can understand that the terminal 700 may also include a power supply (such as a battery) that supplies power to various components. The power supply may be logically connected to the processor 710 through a power management system, thereby managing charging, discharging, and power consumption through the power management system. Management and other functions. The terminal structure shown in FIG. 11 does not constitute a limitation on the terminal. The terminal may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or some components may be combined or arranged differently, which will not be described again here.
应理解的是,本申请实施例中,输入单元704可以包括图形处理单元(Graphics Processing Unit,GPU)7041和麦克风7042,图形处理器7041对在视频捕获模式或图像捕获模式中由图像捕获装置(如摄像头)获得的静态图片或视频的图像数据进行处理。显示单元706可包括显示面板7061,可以采用液晶显示器、有机发光二极管等形式来配置显示面板7061。用户输入单元707包括触控面板7071以及其他输入设备7072中的至少一种。触控面板7071,也称为触摸屏。触控面板7071可包括触摸检测装置和触摸控制器两个部分。其他输入设备7072可以包括但不限于物理键盘、功能键(比如音量控制按键、开关按键等)、轨迹球、鼠标、操作杆,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the input unit 704 may include a graphics processing unit (Graphics Processing Unit, GPU) 7041 and a microphone 7042. The graphics processor 7041 is responsible for the image capture device (GPU) in the video capture mode or the image capture mode. Process the image data of still pictures or videos obtained by cameras (such as cameras). The display unit 706 may include a display panel 7061, which may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display, an organic light emitting diode, or the like. The user input unit 707 includes a touch panel 7071 and at least one of other input devices 7072 . Touch panel 7071, also called touch screen. The touch panel 7071 may include two parts: a touch detection device and a touch controller. Other input devices 7072 may include but are not limited to physical keyboards, function keys (such as volume control keys, switch keys, etc.), trackballs, mice, and joysticks, which will not be described again here.
本申请实施例中,射频单元701接收来自网络侧设备的下行数据后,可以传输给处理器710进行处理;另外,射频单元701可以向网络侧设备发送上行数据。通常,射频单元701包括但不限于天线、放大器、收发信机、耦合器、低噪声放大器、双工器等。In this embodiment of the present application, after receiving downlink data from the network side device, the radio frequency unit 701 can transmit it to the processor 710 for processing; in addition, the radio frequency unit 701 can send uplink data to the network side device. Generally, the radio frequency unit 701 includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, amplifier, transceiver, coupler, low noise amplifier, duplexer, etc.
存储器709可用于存储软件程序或指令以及各种数据。存储器709可主要包括存储程序或指令的第一存储区和存储数据的第二存储区,其中,第一存储区可存储操作系统、至少一个功能所需的应用程序或指令(比如声音播放功能、图像播放功能等)等。此外,存储器709可以包括易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或者,存储器709可以包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM),静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM,DDRSDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(Synch link DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DRRAM)。本申请实施例中的存储器709包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。Memory 709 may be used to store software programs or instructions as well as various data. The memory 709 may mainly include a first storage area for storing programs or instructions and a second storage area for storing data, wherein the first storage area may store an operating system, an application program or instructions required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, Image playback function, etc.) etc. Additionally, memory 709 may include volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or memory 709 may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically removable memory. Erase programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory can be random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), static random access memory (Static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (Dynamic RAM, DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (Synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (Double Data Rate SDRAM, DDRSDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (Synch link DRAM) , SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DRRAM). Memory 709 in embodiments of the present application includes, but is not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
处理器710可包括一个或多个处理单元;可选的,处理器710集成应用处理器和调制 解调处理器,其中,应用处理器主要处理涉及操作系统、用户界面和应用程序等的操作,调制解调处理器主要处理无线通信信号,如基带处理器。可以理解的是,上述调制解调处理器也可以不集成到处理器710中。The processor 710 may include one or more processing units; optionally, the processor 710 integrates an application processor and modulation Demodulation processor, among which the application processor mainly processes operations involving the operating system, user interface and application programs, etc., and the modem processor mainly processes wireless communication signals, such as baseband processor. It can be understood that the above-mentioned modem processor may not be integrated into the processor 710.
当第一通信设备为网络侧设备时,本申请实施例还提供一种网络侧设备,包括处理器和通信接口。该网络侧设备实施例与上述网络侧设备方法实施例对应,上述方法实施例的各个实施过程和实现方式均可适用于该网络侧设备实施例中,且能达到相同的技术效果。When the first communication device is a network-side device, embodiments of the present application further provide a network-side device, including a processor and a communication interface. This network-side device embodiment corresponds to the above-mentioned network-side device method embodiment. Each implementation process and implementation manner of the above-mentioned method embodiment can be applied to this network-side device embodiment, and can achieve the same technical effect.
具体地,本申请实施例还提供了一种网络侧设备。如图12所示,该网络侧设备800包括:天线81、射频装置82、基带装置83、处理器84和存储器85。天线81与射频装置82连接。在上行方向上,射频装置82通过天线81接收信息,将接收的信息发送给基带装置83进行处理。在下行方向上,基带装置83对要发送的信息进行处理,并发送给射频装置82,射频装置82对收到的信息进行处理后经过天线81发送出去。Specifically, the embodiment of the present application also provides a network side device. As shown in FIG. 12 , the network side device 800 includes: an antenna 81 , a radio frequency device 82 , a baseband device 83 , a processor 84 and a memory 85 . The antenna 81 is connected to the radio frequency device 82 . In the uplink direction, the radio frequency device 82 receives information through the antenna 81 and sends the received information to the baseband device 83 for processing. In the downlink direction, the baseband device 83 processes the information to be sent and sends it to the radio frequency device 82. The radio frequency device 82 processes the received information and then sends it out through the antenna 81.
以上实施例中网络侧设备执行的方法可以在基带装置83中实现,该基带装置83包括基带处理器。The method performed by the network side device in the above embodiment can be implemented in the baseband device 83, which includes a baseband processor.
基带装置83例如可以包括至少一个基带板,该基带板上设置有多个芯片,如图12所示,其中一个芯片例如为基带处理器,通过总线接口与存储器85连接,以调用存储器85中的程序,执行以上方法实施例中所示的网络设备操作。The baseband device 83 may include, for example, at least one baseband board on which multiple chips are disposed, as shown in FIG. Program to perform the network device operations shown in the above method embodiments.
该网络侧设备还可以包括网络接口86,该接口例如为通用公共无线接口(common public radio interface,CPRI)。The network side device may also include a network interface 86, which is, for example, a common public radio interface (CPRI).
具体地,本发明实施例的网络侧设备800还包括:存储在存储器85上并可在处理器84上运行的指令或程序,处理器84调用存储器85中的指令或程序执行如上所述的扩展非连续接收的配置方法,并达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,故不在此赘述。Specifically, the network side device 800 in this embodiment of the present invention also includes: instructions or programs stored in the memory 85 and executable on the processor 84. The processor 84 calls the instructions or programs in the memory 85 to perform the expansion as described above. The configuration method of discontinuous reception can achieve the same technical effect. To avoid duplication, it will not be described in detail here.
本申请实施例还提供一种可读存储介质,所述可读存储介质上存储有程序或指令,该程序或指令被处理器执行时实现上述扩展非连续接收的配置方法实施例的各个过程,且能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。Embodiments of the present application also provide a readable storage medium, with a program or instructions stored on the readable storage medium. When the program or instructions are executed by a processor, each process of the above extended discontinuous reception configuration method embodiment is implemented. And can achieve the same technical effect. To avoid repetition, they will not be described again here.
其中,所述处理器为上述实施例中所述的终端中的处理器。所述可读存储介质,包括计算机可读存储介质,如计算机只读存储器ROM、随机存取存储器RAM、磁碟或者光盘等。Wherein, the processor is the processor in the terminal described in the above embodiment. The readable storage medium includes computer readable storage media, such as computer read-only memory ROM, random access memory RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk, etc.
本申请实施例另提供了一种芯片,所述芯片包括处理器和通信接口,所述通信接口和所述处理器耦合,所述处理器用于运行程序或指令,实现上述扩展非连续接收的配置方法实施例的各个过程,且能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip. The chip includes a processor and a communication interface. The communication interface is coupled to the processor. The processor is used to run programs or instructions to implement the above configuration of extended discontinuous reception. Each process of the method embodiment can achieve the same technical effect, so to avoid repetition, it will not be described again here.
应理解,本申请实施例提到的芯片还可以称为系统级芯片,系统芯片,芯片系统或片上系统芯片等。It should be understood that the chips mentioned in the embodiments of this application may also be called system-on-chip, system-on-a-chip, system-on-chip or system-on-chip, etc.
本申请实施例另提供了一种计算机程序/程序产品,所述计算机程序/程序产品被存储在存储介质中,所述计算机程序/程序产品被至少一个处理器执行以实现上述扩展非连续接收的配置方法实施例的各个过程,且能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,这里不再赘 述。Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program/program product. The computer program/program product is stored in a storage medium. The computer program/program product is executed by at least one processor to implement the above extended discontinuous reception. Each process of the configuration method embodiment can achieve the same technical effect. To avoid duplication, it will not be repeated here. narrate.
本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统,包括:第一通信设备及第二通信设备,所述第一通信设备可用于执行如上所述的扩展非连续接收的配置方法的步骤,所述第二通信设备可用于执行如上所述的扩展非连续接收的配置方法的步骤。An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, including: a first communication device and a second communication device. The first communication device can be configured to perform the steps of the extended discontinuous reception configuration method as described above. The third communication device The two communication devices may be configured to perform the steps of the extended discontinuous reception configuration method as described above.
需要说明的是,在本文中,术语“包括”、“包含”或者其任何其他变体意在涵盖非排他性的包含,从而使得包括一系列要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置不仅包括那些要素,而且还包括没有明确列出的其他要素,或者是还包括为这种过程、方法、物品或者装置所固有的要素。在没有更多限制的情况下,由语句“包括一个……”限定的要素,并不排除在包括该要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置中还存在另外的相同要素。此外,需要指出的是,本申请实施方式中的方法和装置的范围不限按示出或讨论的顺序来执行功能,还可包括根据所涉及的功能按基本同时的方式或按相反的顺序来执行功能,例如,可以按不同于所描述的次序来执行所描述的方法,并且还可以添加、省去、或组合各种步骤。另外,参照某些示例所描述的特征可在其他示例中被组合。It should be noted that, in this document, the terms "comprising", "comprises" or any other variations thereof are intended to cover a non-exclusive inclusion, such that a process, method, article or device that includes a series of elements not only includes those elements, It also includes other elements not expressly listed or inherent in the process, method, article or apparatus. Without further limitation, an element defined by the statement "comprises a..." does not exclude the presence of additional identical elements in a process, method, article or apparatus that includes that element. In addition, it should be pointed out that the scope of the methods and devices in the embodiments of the present application is not limited to performing functions in the order shown or discussed, but may also include performing functions in a substantially simultaneous manner or in reverse order according to the functions involved. Functions may be performed, for example, the methods described may be performed in an order different from that described, and various steps may be added, omitted, or combined. Additionally, features described with reference to certain examples may be combined in other examples.
通过以上的实施方式的描述,本领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到上述实施例方法可借助软件加必需的通用硬件平台的方式来实现,当然也可以通过硬件,但很多情况下前者是更佳的实施方式。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分可以以计算机软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质(如ROM/RAM、磁碟、光盘)中,包括若干指令用以使得一台终端(可以是手机,计算机,服务器,空调器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述的方法。Through the above description of the embodiments, those skilled in the art can clearly understand that the methods of the above embodiments can be implemented by means of software plus the necessary general hardware platform. Of course, it can also be implemented by hardware, but in many cases the former is better. implementation. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a computer software product that is essentially or contributes to the existing technology. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium (such as ROM/RAM, disk , CD), including several instructions to cause a terminal (which can be a mobile phone, computer, server, air conditioner, or network device, etc.) to execute the methods described in various embodiments of this application.
上面结合附图对本申请的实施例进行了描述,但是本申请并不局限于上述的具体实施方式,上述的具体实施方式仅仅是示意性的,而不是限制性的,本领域的普通技术人员在本申请的启示下,在不脱离本申请宗旨和权利要求所保护的范围情况下,还可做出很多形式,均属于本申请的保护之内。 The embodiments of the present application have been described above in conjunction with the accompanying drawings. However, the present application is not limited to the above-mentioned specific implementations. The above-mentioned specific implementations are only illustrative and not restrictive. Those of ordinary skill in the art will Inspired by this application, many forms can be made without departing from the purpose of this application and the scope protected by the claims, all of which fall within the protection of this application.

Claims (63)

  1. 一种扩展非连续接收的配置方法,包括:A configuration method for extended discontinuous reception, including:
    第一通信设备获取第一终端的第一信息,所述第一信息用于所述第一通信设备确定所述第一终端在多个非连续接收DRX配置下的目标信息;The first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, the first information is used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
    所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:The target information includes at least one of the following:
    目标DRX配置信息;Target DRX configuration information;
    定位参考信号SRS的信息;Positioning reference signal SRS information;
    用于测量和/或处理定位参考信号的测量窗的信息;Information on the measurement window used to measure and/or process the positioning reference signal;
    其中第一信息包括以下至少一项:The first information includes at least one of the following:
    所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX的配置信息;Configuration information of at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
    所述第一终端的标识信息;The identification information of the first terminal;
    所述第一终端的寻呼paging的时频位置或周期信息。The time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述多个DRX包括以下至少两项:The method of claim 1, wherein the plurality of DRXs include at least two of the following:
    核心网CN扩展非连续接收eDRX;Core network CN extends discontinuous reception eDRX;
    CN DRX;CN DRX;
    默认的无线接入网RAN paging;Default radio access network RAN paging;
    默认的DRX;Default DRX;
    默认的eDRX;Default eDRX;
    UE专属的DRX;UE exclusive DRX;
    UE专属的eDRX;UE-specific eDRX;
    大于10.24s的RAN eDRX;RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s;
    小于10.24s的RAN eDRX。RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,所述第一通信设备获取所述第一终端的第一信息包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein the first communication device obtaining the first information of the first terminal includes:
    所述第一通信设备从所述第一终端获取所述第一信息;或The first communication device obtains the first information from the first terminal; or
    所述第一通信设备从认证管理功能AMF获取所述第一信息。The first communication device obtains the first information from an authentication management function AMF.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其中,所述第一通信设备从所述第一终端获取的所述第一信息包含于所述第一终端上报的第一辅助信息中。The method according to claim 3, wherein the first information obtained by the first communication device from the first terminal is included in the first auxiliary information reported by the first terminal.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其中,所述第一辅助信息还包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 4, wherein the first auxiliary information further includes at least one of the following:
    所述第一终端倾向的无线资源控制RRC状态;The radio resource control RRC state preferred by the first terminal;
    所述第一终端倾向的目标DRX的配置信息;Configuration information of the target DRX preferred by the first terminal;
    定位的优先级;Positioning priority;
    CN eDRX使能信息或大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的使能信息;CN eDRX enabling information or RAN eDRX enabling information greater than 10.24s;
    所述第一终端倾向的大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的配置信息; The RAN eDRX configuration information preferred by the first terminal is greater than 10.24s;
    所述第一终端倾向的目标信息的配置区域的信息;Information about the configuration area of the target information preferred by the first terminal;
    所述CN eDRX或CN DRX的配置区域的信息。Information about the configuration area of the CN eDRX or CN DRX.
  6. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 3, wherein,
    在所述第一通信设备为基站的情况下,所述第一信息携带在RRC消息中;或When the first communication device is a base station, the first information is carried in an RRC message; or
    在所述第一通信设备为位置管理功能LMF的情况下,所述第一信息携带在长期演进定位协议LPP消息中。In the case where the first communication device is a location management function LMF, the first information is carried in a Long Term Evolution Positioning Protocol LPP message.
  7. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 4, wherein
    在所述第一终端处于RRC非激活态或空闲态时,所述第一辅助信息携带在小数据传输SDT中。When the first terminal is in the RRC inactive state or idle state, the first auxiliary information is carried in the small data transmission SDT.
  8. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其中,在所述第一通信设备为基站的情况下,所述第一通信设备从AMF获取的所述第一信息携带在以下至少一项中:The method according to claim 3, wherein, when the first communication device is a base station, the first information obtained by the first communication device from the AMF is carried in at least one of the following:
    注册请求;Registration request;
    服务请求;Request for service;
    切换请求;Switch request;
    N2消息;N2 message;
    N2消息的激活消息;Activation message of N2 message;
    定位寻呼原因;Location paging reason;
    N2挂起响应消息。N2 hangs response message.
  9. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其中,在所述第一通信设备为LMF的情况下,所述第一通信设备从AMF获取的所述第一信息携带在以下至少一项中:The method according to claim 3, wherein, in the case where the first communication device is an LMF, the first information obtained by the first communication device from the AMF is carried in at least one of the following:
    所述AMF发送的位置服务请求;The location service request sent by the AMF;
    Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation消息。Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation message.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其中,所述第一信息还包括以下至少一项:The method of claim 9, wherein the first information further includes at least one of the following:
    CN eDRX使能信息或大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的使能信息;CN eDRX enabling information or RAN eDRX enabling information greater than 10.24s;
    目标信息的配置区域的信息。Information about the configuration area of the target information.
  11. 根据权利要求3,9或10所述的方法,其中,所述第一通信设备为LMF,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 3, 9 or 10, wherein the first communication device is an LMF, the method further comprising:
    所述第一通信设备推荐所述终端的第一目标信息给基站,以使所述基站结合所述第一目标信息确定配置给终端的目标信息。The first communication device recommends the first target information of the terminal to the base station, so that the base station determines the target information configured for the terminal in combination with the first target information.
  12. 根据权利要求5至10中任一项所述的方法,其中,目标信息的配置区域的信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to any one of claims 5 to 10, wherein the information of the configuration area of the target information includes at least one of the following:
    小区列表;Community list;
    Tracking area标识;Tracking area logo;
    注册区域;registration area;
    RNA标识; RNA identification;
    区域标识;area identification;
    当前小区。Current neighborhood.
  13. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其中,第一通信设备获取所述第一终端的第一信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein before the first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, the method further includes:
    所述第一通信设备向所述第一终端或AMF发送请求信息,指示所述第一终端或AMF反馈所述第一信息。The first communication device sends request information to the first terminal or AMF, instructing the first terminal or AMF to feed back the first information.
  14. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其中,第一通信设备获取所述第一终端的第一信息之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein after the first communication device obtains the first information of the first terminal, the method further includes:
    所述第一通信设备向所述第一终端或AMF发送响应信息,所述响应信息包括所述目标信息。The first communication device sends response information to the first terminal or AMF, where the response information includes the target information.
  15. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,触发所述第一通信设备获取所述第一信息或者确定所述目标信息的触发事件包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 2, wherein the triggering event that triggers the first communication device to obtain the first information or determine the target information includes at least one of the following:
    定位服务请求;Location service request;
    网络侧设备准备在RRC释放release消息中配置所述目标信息;The network side device prepares to configure the target information in the RRC release message;
    第一终端倾向进入eDRX并保留定位服务;The first terminal tends to enter eDRX and retain positioning services;
    AMF接收到延迟终端终止定位请求MT-LR、MT-LR和终端始发定位请求MO-LR中的至少一项;The AMF receives at least one of the delayed terminal terminated positioning request MT-LR, MT-LR and the terminal originated positioning request MO-LR;
    AMF收到位于CN eDRX或大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的终端的位置服务请求;AMF receives a location service request from a terminal located at CN eDRX or RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s;
    终端收到用于指示低功率low power的指示信息;The terminal receives indication information indicating low power;
    AMF收到包括指示为低功率low power的位置服务请求。AMF receives a location service request that includes an indication of low power.
  16. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述多个DRX包括eDRX时,所述eDRX的配置信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 1, wherein when the plurality of DRXs include eDRX, the configuration information of the eDRX includes at least one of the following:
    eDRX的周期;eDRX cycle;
    寻呼时间窗口PTW的长度;The length of the paging time window PTW;
    PTW的起始位置;The starting position of PTW;
    其中,所述eDRX包括以下至少一项:Wherein, the eDRX includes at least one of the following:
    目标eDRX;target eDRX;
    终端倾向的目标eDRX;Terminal-inclined target eDRX;
    CN eDRX;CN eDRX;
    默认的eDRX;Default eDRX;
    UE专属的eDRX;UE-specific eDRX;
    大于10.24s的RAN eDRX;RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s;
    小于10.24s的RAN eDRX。RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
  17. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,所述测量窗的信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 2, wherein the information of the measurement window includes at least one of the following:
    所述测量窗的预配置标识; The preconfigured identification of the measurement window;
    所述测量窗的时域位置;The time domain position of the measurement window;
    所述测量窗的长度;The length of the measurement window;
    所述测量窗的周期。The period of the measurement window.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其中,所述测量窗的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联。The method of claim 17, wherein the configuration information of the measurement window is associated with the configuration information of the plurality of DRXs or target DRXs.
  19. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法,其中,所述测量窗的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联,包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 17 or 18, wherein the configuration information of the measurement window is associated with the configuration information of the plurality of DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
    所述测量窗与终端的标识信息存在关联关系;The measurement window is associated with the identification information of the terminal;
    所述测量窗的周期与PTW的周期相关;The period of the measurement window is related to the period of the PTW;
    所述测量窗的超帧与所述PTW的超帧相关;The superframe of the measurement window is related to the superframe of the PTW;
    所述测量窗的起始slot与寻呼机会PO和/或寻呼帧PF相关;The starting slot of the measurement window is related to the paging opportunity PO and/or the paging frame PF;
    其中,所述PTW包括以下至少一项:Wherein, the PTW includes at least one of the following:
    所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
    所述目标DRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by the target DRX;
    所述终端最终确定的PTW位置。The terminal's final determined PTW position.
  20. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法,其中,所述测量窗在PTW内或PTW外不同,包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 17 or 18, wherein the measurement window is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, including at least one of the following:
    在所述PTW内,所述测量窗的周期与PTW或寻呼paging的周期相关;Within the PTW, the period of the measurement window is related to the period of the PTW or paging;
    在所述PTW外,所述测量窗的配置信息为默认的配置信息;Outside the PTW, the configuration information of the measurement window is default configuration information;
    在所述PTW内,所述测量窗的起始slot与paging的时域位置相关;Within the PTW, the starting slot of the measurement window is related to the time domain position of paging;
    在所述PTW外,所述测量窗的周期上不测量和/或处理所述定位参考信号。Outside the PTW, the positioning reference signal is not measured and/or processed over the period of the measurement window.
  21. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 17 or 18, wherein,
    所述测量窗的配置信息包括第一配置信息和第二配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于PTW内的定位参考信号的测量和/或处理,所述第二配置信息用于所述PTW外的定位参考信号的测量和/或处理。The configuration information of the measurement window includes first configuration information and second configuration information. The first configuration information is used for measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals within the PTW. The second configuration information is used for the PTW. Measurement and/or processing of external positioning reference signals.
  22. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其中,所述测量窗位于PTW内的情况下,满足以下至少一项:The method according to claim 19, wherein when the measurement window is located within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
    所述测量窗不与所述PO位置重叠;The measurement window does not overlap with the PO position;
    所述测量窗位于所述PO位置之后;The measurement window is located behind the PO position;
    当所述测量窗包括所述PO位置时,丢弃drop掉所述测量窗的定位参考信号测量和/或处理,在所述PO位置执行paging;When the measurement window includes the PO position, discard the positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing that dropped the measurement window, and perform paging at the PO position;
    当所述测量窗包括所述PO位置时,drop掉所述测量窗内与PO位置重叠的定位参考信号测量和/或处理,在所述PO位置执行paging;When the measurement window includes the PO position, drop the positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing that overlaps with the PO position in the measurement window, and perform paging at the PO position;
    当所述测量窗包括所述PO位置时,执行定位参考信号测量和/或处理;When the measurement window includes the PO position, perform positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing;
    其中,所述PTW包括以下至少之一: Wherein, the PTW includes at least one of the following:
    所述CN eDRX指示的PTW位置The PTW location indicated by the CN eDRX
    所述RAN eDRX指示的PTW位置The PTW location indicated by the RAN eDRX
    所述第一终端最终确定的PTW位置。The PTW position finally determined by the first terminal.
  23. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,在所述第一通信设备为基站的情况下,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein when the first communication device is a base station, the method further includes:
    所述第一通信设备与LMF或至少一个邻小区交互以下至少一项:The first communication device interacts with the LMF or at least one neighboring cell at least one of the following:
    所述邻小区默认的DRX配置信息;The default DRX configuration information of the neighboring cell;
    所述邻小区默认的eDRX配置信息;The default eDRX configuration information of the neighboring cell;
    所述邻小区默认的paging配置信息。The default paging configuration information of the neighboring cell.
  24. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,所述终端的定位参考信号的配置信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 2, wherein the configuration information of the positioning reference signal of the terminal includes at least one of the following:
    SRS的序列标识;Sequence identifier of SRS;
    SRS的周期;SRS cycle;
    SRS的时域位置。Time domain position of SRS.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的方法,其中,所述定位参考信号的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联。The method of claim 24, wherein the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is associated with the configuration information of the plurality of DRXs or target DRXs.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法,其中,所述定位参考信号的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联,包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 25, wherein the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is associated with the configuration information of the plurality of DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
    所述定位参考信号与所述第一终端的标识信息存在关联关系;The positioning reference signal is associated with the identification information of the first terminal;
    所述定位参考信号的周期与PTW的周期相关;The period of the positioning reference signal is related to the period of the PTW;
    所述定位参考信号的的超帧与所述PTW的超帧相关;The superframe of the positioning reference signal is related to the superframe of the PTW;
    所述定位参考信号的起始slot与寻呼机会PO和/或寻呼帧PF相关;The starting slot of the positioning reference signal is related to the paging opportunity PO and/or the paging frame PF;
    其中,所述PTW包括以下至少一项:Wherein, the PTW includes at least one of the following:
    所述CN eDRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by the CN eDRX;
    所述RAN eDRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by the RAN eDRX;
    所述终端最终确定的PTW位置。The terminal's final determined PTW position.
  27. 根据权利要求24或25所述的方法,其中,所述SRS的周期在PTW内或PTW外不同,和/或,SRS的周期内时域偏移在PTW内或PTW外不同。The method according to claim 24 or 25, wherein the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, and/or the intra-period time domain offset of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的方法,其中,所述SRS的周期位于PTW内的情况下,满足以下至少一项:The method according to claim 27, wherein when the period of the SRS is within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
    所述SRS的周期为配置的第一周期;The period of the SRS is the configured first period;
    所述SRS的周期与PTW的周期相关;The period of the SRS is related to the period of the PTW;
    所述SRS的周期与第一周期和paging的周期相关;The cycle of the SRS is related to the first cycle and the cycle of paging;
    所述SRS的周期与paging的周期相关。The SRS cycle is related to the paging cycle.
  29. 根据权利要求27所述的方法,其中,所述SRS的周期位于PTW外的情况下,所 述SRS的周期满足以下至少一项:The method according to claim 27, wherein when the period of the SRS is outside the PTW, the The period of the above-mentioned SRS satisfies at least one of the following:
    与RAN eDRX周期相关;Related to the RAN eDRX cycle;
    与CN eDRX周期相关;Related to CN eDRX cycle;
    所述SRS的周期为配置的第一周期的K倍,K为整数;The period of the SRS is K times the configured first period, and K is an integer;
    所述SRS的周期为配置的第二周期。The SRS cycle is the configured second cycle.
  30. 根据权利要求24所述的方法,其中,所述SRS的序列标识与所述第一终端的标识信息存在关联关系,所述关联关系满足以下至少一项:The method according to claim 24, wherein the sequence identifier of the SRS has an association relationship with the identification information of the first terminal, and the association relationship satisfies at least one of the following:
    根据所述第一终端的临时身份标识5G-S-TMSI的后10位或后16位或前10位或前16位确定所述SRS的序列标识;Determine the sequence identifier of the SRS according to the last 10 digits or the last 16 digits or the first 10 digits or the first 16 digits of the first terminal's temporary identity identifier 5G-S-TMSI;
    根据所述第一终端的哈希计算值Hashed ID确定所述SRS的序列标识。The sequence identifier of the SRS is determined according to the hash calculation value Hashed ID of the first terminal.
  31. 一种扩展非连续接收的配置方法,包括:A configuration method for extended discontinuous reception, including:
    第二通信设备发送第一终端的第一信息,所述第一信息用于第一通信设备确定所述第一终端在多个非连续接收DRX配置下的目标信息;The second communication device sends the first information of the first terminal, the first information is used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
    所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:The target information includes at least one of the following:
    目标DRX配置信息;Target DRX configuration information;
    定位参考信号SRS的信息;Positioning reference signal SRS information;
    用于测量和/或处理定位参考信号的测量窗的信息;Information on the measurement window used to measure and/or process the positioning reference signal;
    其中第一信息包括以下至少一项:The first information includes at least one of the following:
    所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX的配置信息;Configuration information of at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
    所述第一终端的标识信息;The identification information of the first terminal;
    所述第一终端的寻呼paging的时频位置或周期信息。The time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的方法,其中,所述多个DRX包括以下至少两项:The method of claim 31, wherein the plurality of DRXs include at least two of the following:
    核心网CN扩展非连续接收eDRX;Core network CN extends discontinuous reception eDRX;
    CN DRX;CN DRX;
    默认的无线接入网RAN paging;Default radio access network RAN paging;
    默认的DRX;Default DRX;
    默认的eDRX;Default eDRX;
    UE专属的DRX;UE exclusive DRX;
    UE专属的eDRX;UE-specific eDRX;
    大于10.24s的RAN eDRX;RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s;
    小于10.24s的RAN eDRX。RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
  33. 根据权利要求31所述的方法,其中,所述第二通信设备发送第一终端的第一信息包括:The method according to claim 31, wherein the second communication device sending the first information of the first terminal includes:
    所述第一终端发送所述第一信息;或The first terminal sends the first information; or
    认证管理功能AMF发送所述第一信息。 The authentication management function AMF sends the first information.
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的方法,其中,所述第一终端发送的所述第一信息包含于所述第一终端上报的第一辅助信息中。The method according to claim 33, wherein the first information sent by the first terminal is included in the first auxiliary information reported by the first terminal.
  35. 根据权利要求34所述的方法,其中,所述第一辅助信息还包括以下至少一项:The method of claim 34, wherein the first auxiliary information further includes at least one of the following:
    所述第一终端倾向的无线资源控制RRC状态;The radio resource control RRC state preferred by the first terminal;
    定位的优先级;Positioning priority;
    CN eDRX使能信息或大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的使能信息;CN eDRX enabling information or RAN eDRX enabling information greater than 10.24s;
    所述第一终端倾向的大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的配置信息;The RAN eDRX configuration information preferred by the first terminal is greater than 10.24s;
    所述第一终端倾向的目标信息的配置区域的信息;Information about the configuration area of the target information preferred by the first terminal;
    所述CN eDRX或CN DRX的配置区域的信息。Information about the configuration area of the CN eDRX or CN DRX.
  36. 根据权利要求34所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 34, wherein:
    在所述第一通信设备为基站的情况下,所述第一信息携带在RRC消息中;或When the first communication device is a base station, the first information is carried in an RRC message; or
    在所述第一通信设备为位置管理功能LMF的情况下,所述第一信息携带在长期演进定位协议LPP消息中。In the case where the first communication device is a location management function LMF, the first information is carried in a Long Term Evolution Positioning Protocol LPP message.
  37. 根据权利要求34所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 34, wherein:
    在所述第一终端处于RRC非激活态或空闲态时,所述第一辅助信息携带在小数据传输SDT中。When the first terminal is in the RRC inactive state or idle state, the first auxiliary information is carried in the small data transmission SDT.
  38. 根据权利要求33所述的方法,其中,在所述第一通信设备为基站的情况下,AMF发送的所述第一信息携带在以下至少一项中:The method according to claim 33, wherein when the first communication device is a base station, the first information sent by the AMF is carried in at least one of the following:
    注册请求;Registration request;
    服务请求;Request for service;
    切换请求;Switch request;
    N2消息;N2 message;
    N2消息的激活消息;Activation message of N2 message;
    定位寻呼原因;Location paging reason;
    N2挂起响应消息。N2 hangs response message.
  39. 根据权利要求33所述的方法,其中,在所述第一通信设备为LMF的情况下,AMF发送的所述第一信息携带在以下至少一项中:The method according to claim 33, wherein when the first communication device is an LMF, the first information sent by the AMF is carried in at least one of the following:
    所述AMF发送的位置服务请求;The location service request sent by the AMF;
    Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation消息。Nlmf_Location_DetermineLocation message.
  40. 根据权利要求39所述的方法,其中,所述第一信息还包括以下至少一项:The method of claim 39, wherein the first information further includes at least one of the following:
    CN eDRX使能信息或大于10.24s的RAN eDRX的使能信息;CN eDRX enabling information or RAN eDRX enabling information greater than 10.24s;
    目标信息的配置区域的信息。Information about the configuration area of the target information.
  41. 根据权利要求35至40中任一项所述的方法,其中,目标信息的配置区域的信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to any one of claims 35 to 40, wherein the information of the configuration area of the target information includes at least one of the following:
    小区列表; Community list;
    Tracking area标识;Tracking area logo;
    注册区域;registration area;
    RNA标识;RNA identification;
    区域标识;area identification;
    当前小区。Current neighborhood.
  42. 根据权利要求33所述的方法,其中,第二通信设备发送第一终端的第一信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 33, wherein before the second communication device sends the first information of the first terminal, the method further includes:
    所述第二通信设备接收所述第一通信设备的请求信息,指示所述第二通信设备反馈所述第一信息。The second communication device receives the request information from the first communication device and instructs the second communication device to feed back the first information.
  43. 根据权利要求33所述的方法,其中,第二通信设备发送第一终端的第一信息之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 33, wherein after the second communication device sends the first information of the first terminal, the method further includes:
    所述第二通信设备接收所述第一通信设备的响应信息,所述响应信息包括所述目标信息。The second communication device receives response information from the first communication device, where the response information includes the target information.
  44. 根据权利要求32所述的方法,其中,所述多个DRX包括eDRX时,所述eDRX的配置信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 32, wherein when the plurality of DRXs include eDRX, the configuration information of the eDRX includes at least one of the following:
    eDRX的周期;eDRX cycle;
    寻呼时间窗口PTW的长度;The length of the paging time window PTW;
    PTW的起始位置;The starting position of PTW;
    其中,所述eDRX包括以下至少一项:Wherein, the eDRX includes at least one of the following:
    目标eDRX;target eDRX;
    终端倾向的目标eDRX;Terminal-inclined target eDRX;
    CN eDRX;CN eDRX;
    默认的eDRX;Default eDRX;
    UE专属的eDRX;UE-specific eDRX;
    大于10.24s的RAN eDRX;RAN eDRX greater than 10.24s;
    小于10.24s的RAN eDRX。RAN eDRX in less than 10.24s.
  45. 根据权利要求32所述的方法,其中,所述测量窗的信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 32, wherein the information of the measurement window includes at least one of the following:
    所述测量窗的预配置标识;The preconfigured identification of the measurement window;
    所述测量窗的时域位置;The time domain position of the measurement window;
    所述测量窗的长度;The length of the measurement window;
    所述测量窗的周期。The period of the measurement window.
  46. 根据权利要求45所述的方法,其中,所述测量窗的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联。The method of claim 45, wherein the configuration information of the measurement window is associated with the configuration information of the plurality of DRXs or target DRXs.
  47. 根据权利要求45或46所述的方法,其中,所述测量窗的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联,包括以下至少一项: The method according to claim 45 or 46, wherein the configuration information of the measurement window is associated with the configuration information of the plurality of DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
    所述测量窗与终端的标识信息存在关联关系;The measurement window is associated with the identification information of the terminal;
    所述测量窗的周期与PTW的周期相关;The period of the measurement window is related to the period of the PTW;
    所述测量窗的超帧与所述PTW的超帧相关;The superframe of the measurement window is related to the superframe of the PTW;
    所述测量窗的起始slot与寻呼机会PO和/或寻呼帧PF相关;The starting slot of the measurement window is related to the paging opportunity PO and/or the paging frame PF;
    其中,所述PTW包括以下至少一项:Wherein, the PTW includes at least one of the following:
    所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
    所述目标DRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by the target DRX;
    所述终端最终确定的PTW位置。The terminal's final determined PTW position.
  48. 根据权利要求45或46所述的方法,其中,所述测量窗在PTW内或PTW外不同,包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 45 or 46, wherein the measurement window is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, including at least one of the following:
    在所述PTW内,所述测量窗的周期与PTW或寻呼paging的周期相关;Within the PTW, the period of the measurement window is related to the period of the PTW or paging;
    在所述PTW外,所述测量窗的配置信息为默认的配置信息;Outside the PTW, the configuration information of the measurement window is default configuration information;
    在所述PTW内,所述测量窗的起始slot与paging的时域位置相关;Within the PTW, the starting slot of the measurement window is related to the time domain position of paging;
    在所述PTW外,所述测量窗的周期上不测量和/或处理所述定位参考信号。Outside the PTW, the positioning reference signal is not measured and/or processed over the period of the measurement window.
  49. 根据权利要求45或46所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 45 or 46, wherein,
    所述测量窗的配置信息包括第一配置信息和第二配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于PTW内的定位参考信号的测量和/或处理,所述第二配置信息用于所述PTW外的定位参考信号的测量和/或处理。The configuration information of the measurement window includes first configuration information and second configuration information. The first configuration information is used for measurement and/or processing of positioning reference signals within the PTW. The second configuration information is used for the PTW. Measurement and/or processing of external positioning reference signals.
  50. 根据权利要求47所述的方法,其中,所述测量窗位于PTW内的情况下,满足以下至少一项:The method according to claim 47, wherein when the measurement window is located within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
    所述测量窗不与所述PO位置重叠;The measurement window does not overlap with the PO position;
    所述测量窗位于所述PO位置之后;The measurement window is located behind the PO position;
    当所述测量窗包括所述PO位置时,丢弃drop掉所述测量窗的定位参考信号测量和/或处理,在所述PO位置执行paging;When the measurement window includes the PO position, discard the positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing that dropped the measurement window, and perform paging at the PO position;
    当所述测量窗包括所述PO位置时,drop掉所述测量窗内与PO位置重叠的定位参考信号测量和/或处理,在所述PO位置执行paging;When the measurement window includes the PO position, drop the positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing that overlaps with the PO position in the measurement window, and perform paging at the PO position;
    当所述测量窗包括所述PO位置时,执行定位参考信号测量和/或处理;When the measurement window includes the PO position, perform positioning reference signal measurement and/or processing;
    其中,所述PTW包括以下至少之一:Wherein, the PTW includes at least one of the following:
    所述CN eDRX指示的PTW位置The PTW location indicated by the CN eDRX
    所述RAN eDRX指示的PTW位置The PTW location indicated by the RAN eDRX
    所述第一终端最终确定的PTW位置。The PTW position finally determined by the first terminal.
  51. 根据权利要求32所述的方法,其中,所述终端的定位参考信号的配置信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 32, wherein the configuration information of the positioning reference signal of the terminal includes at least one of the following:
    SRS的序列标识;Sequence identifier of SRS;
    SRS的周期; SRS cycle;
    SRS的时域位置。Time domain position of SRS.
  52. 根据权利要求51所述的方法,其中,所述定位参考信号的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联。The method of claim 51, wherein the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is associated with the configuration information of the plurality of DRXs or target DRXs.
  53. 根据权利要求52所述的方法,其中,所述定位参考信号的配置信息与所述多个DRX或目标DRX的配置信息相关联,包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 52, wherein the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is associated with the configuration information of the plurality of DRXs or target DRXs, including at least one of the following:
    所述定位参考信号与所述第一终端的标识信息存在关联关系;The positioning reference signal is associated with the identification information of the first terminal;
    所述定位参考信号的周期与PTW的周期相关;The period of the positioning reference signal is related to the period of the PTW;
    所述定位参考信号的的超帧与所述PTW的超帧相关;The superframe of the positioning reference signal is related to the superframe of the PTW;
    所述定位参考信号的起始slot与寻呼机会PO/或寻呼帧PF相关;The starting slot of the positioning reference signal is related to the paging opportunity PO/or the paging frame PF;
    其中,所述PTW包括以下至少一项:Wherein, the PTW includes at least one of the following:
    所述CN eDRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by the CN eDRX;
    所述RAN eDRX指示的PTW位置;The PTW position indicated by the RAN eDRX;
    所述终端最终确定的PTW位置。The terminal's final determined PTW position.
  54. 根据权利要求51或52所述的方法,其中,所述SRS的周期在PTW内或PTW外不同,和/或,SRS的周期内时域偏移在PTW内或PTW外不同。The method according to claim 51 or 52, wherein the period of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW, and/or the intra-period time domain offset of the SRS is different within the PTW or outside the PTW.
  55. 根据权利要求54所述的方法,其中,所述SRS的周期位于PTW内的情况下,满足以下至少一项:The method according to claim 54, wherein when the period of the SRS is within the PTW, at least one of the following is satisfied:
    所述SRS的周期为配置的第一周期;The period of the SRS is the configured first period;
    所述SRS的周期与PTW的周期相关;The period of the SRS is related to the period of the PTW;
    所述SRS的周期与第一周期和paging的周期相关;The cycle of the SRS is related to the first cycle and the cycle of paging;
    所述SRS的周期与paging的周期相关。The SRS cycle is related to the paging cycle.
  56. 根据权利要求54所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 54, wherein:
    所述SRS的周期位于PTW外的情况下,所述SRS的周期满足以下至少一项:When the period of the SRS is outside the PTW, the period of the SRS satisfies at least one of the following:
    与RAN eDRX周期相关;Related to the RAN eDRX cycle;
    与CN eDRX周期相关;Related to CN eDRX cycle;
    所述SRS的周期为配置的第一周期的K倍,K为整数;The period of the SRS is K times the configured first period, and K is an integer;
    所述SRS的周期为配置的第二周期。The SRS cycle is the configured second cycle.
  57. 根据权利要求51所述的方法,其中,所述SRS的序列标识与所述第一终端的标识信息存在关联关系,所述关联关系满足以下至少一项:The method according to claim 51, wherein the sequence identifier of the SRS has an association relationship with the identification information of the first terminal, and the association relationship satisfies at least one of the following:
    根据所述第一终端的临时身份标识5G-S-TMSI的后10位或后16位或前10位或前16位确定所述SRS的序列标识;Determine the sequence identifier of the SRS according to the last 10 digits or the last 16 digits or the first 10 digits or the first 16 digits of the first terminal's temporary identity identifier 5G-S-TMSI;
    根据所述第一终端的哈希计算值Hashed ID确定所述SRS的序列标识。The sequence identifier of the SRS is determined according to the hash calculation value Hashed ID of the first terminal.
  58. 根据权利要求51所述的方法,其中,所述第二通信设备为终端,在所述SRS的发送slot或符号与其它上下行数据碰撞的情况下,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 51, wherein the second communication device is a terminal, and in the case where the transmission slot or symbol of the SRS collides with other uplink and downlink data, the method further includes:
    根据SRS周期或SRS优先级,确定是否不传输SRS,包括以下任一项: Determine whether to not transmit SRS based on the SRS cycle or SRS priority, including any of the following:
    若位于PTW内,SRS周期数小于第一阈值,则传输所述SRS,挂起所述上下行数据;If it is within the PTW and the number of SRS cycles is less than the first threshold, the SRS is transmitted and the uplink and downlink data are suspended;
    若位于PTW内,SRS周期数大于第二阈值,则不传输所述SRS,传输所述上下行数据;If it is within the PTW and the number of SRS cycles is greater than the second threshold, the SRS is not transmitted and the uplink and downlink data are transmitted;
    若SRS优先级大于第一优先级等级,则传输所述SRS,挂起所述上下行数据;If the SRS priority is greater than the first priority level, transmit the SRS and suspend the uplink and downlink data;
    若SRS优先级小于第二优先级等级,则不传输所述SRS,传输所述上下行数据。If the SRS priority is lower than the second priority level, the SRS is not transmitted and the uplink and downlink data are transmitted.
  59. 根据权利要求51所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 51, wherein the method further includes:
    在PTW内未发送完预定周期数的SRS的情况下,延长所述PTW以完成所述预定周期数的SRS的发送。If the SRS for the predetermined number of cycles has not been sent within the PTW, the PTW is extended to complete the sending of the SRS for the predetermined number of cycles.
  60. 一种扩展非连续接收的配置装置,包括:A configuration device for extended discontinuous reception, including:
    获取模块,用于获取第一终端的第一信息,所述第一信息用于第一通信设备确定所述第一终端在多个非连续接收DRX配置下的目标信息;An acquisition module, configured to acquire the first information of the first terminal, the first information being used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
    所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:The target information includes at least one of the following:
    目标DRX配置信息;Target DRX configuration information;
    定位参考信号SRS的信息;Positioning reference signal SRS information;
    用于测量和/或处理定位参考信号的测量窗的信息;Information on the measurement window used to measure and/or process the positioning reference signal;
    其中第一信息包括以下至少一项:The first information includes at least one of the following:
    所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX的配置信息;Configuration information of at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
    所述第一终端的标识信息;The identification information of the first terminal;
    所述第一终端的寻呼paging的时频位置或周期信息。The time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
  61. 一种扩展非连续接收的配置装置,包括:A configuration device for extended discontinuous reception, including:
    发送模块,用于发送第一终端的第一信息,所述第一信息用于第一通信设备确定所述第一终端在多个非连续接收DRX配置下的目标信息;A sending module, configured to send the first information of the first terminal, the first information being used by the first communication device to determine the target information of the first terminal under multiple discontinuous reception DRX configurations;
    所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:The target information includes at least one of the following:
    目标DRX配置信息;Target DRX configuration information;
    定位参考信号SRS的信息;Positioning reference signal SRS information;
    用于测量和/或处理定位参考信号的测量窗的信息;Information on the measurement window used to measure and/or process the positioning reference signal;
    其中第一信息包括以下至少一项:The first information includes at least one of the following:
    所述多个DRX中至少一个DRX的配置信息;Configuration information of at least one DRX among the plurality of DRXs;
    所述第一终端的标识信息;The identification information of the first terminal;
    所述第一终端的寻呼paging的时频位置或周期信息。The time-frequency position or period information of paging of the first terminal.
  62. 一种通信设备,包括处理器和存储器,所述存储器存储可在所述处理器上运行的程序或指令,所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现如权利要求1至59任一项所述的扩展非连续接收的配置方法的步骤。A communication device, including a processor and a memory, the memory stores a program or instructions that can be run on the processor, and when the program or instructions are executed by the processor, any one of claims 1 to 59 is implemented. The steps of the extended discontinuous reception configuration method.
  63. 一种可读存储介质,所述可读存储介质上存储程序或指令,所述程序或指令被处理器执行时实现如权利要求1-59任一项所述的扩展非连续接收的配置方法的步骤。 A readable storage medium on which a program or instructions are stored. When the program or instructions are executed by a processor, the configuration method for extended discontinuous reception as described in any one of claims 1-59 is implemented. step.
PCT/CN2023/110476 2022-08-02 2023-08-01 Extended discontinuous reception configuration method, apparatus and communication device WO2024027678A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210924098.4A CN117544977A (en) 2022-08-02 2022-08-02 Configuration method and device for extended discontinuous reception and communication equipment
CN202210924098.4 2022-08-02

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024027678A1 true WO2024027678A1 (en) 2024-02-08

Family

ID=89784823

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/110476 WO2024027678A1 (en) 2022-08-02 2023-08-01 Extended discontinuous reception configuration method, apparatus and communication device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117544977A (en)
WO (1) WO2024027678A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104094644A (en) * 2011-10-04 2014-10-08 三星电子株式会社 A system and a method of configuring radio access network parameters for a user equipment connected to a wireless network system
US20150189613A1 (en) * 2013-12-30 2015-07-02 Mediatek Inc. Apparatuses and methods for physical broadcast channel (pbch) assisted synchronization during a discontinuous reception (drx) operation
CN114223168A (en) * 2019-08-12 2022-03-22 高通股份有限公司 Interaction of Discontinuous Reception (DRX) with Positioning Reference Signal (PRS) resources

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104094644A (en) * 2011-10-04 2014-10-08 三星电子株式会社 A system and a method of configuring radio access network parameters for a user equipment connected to a wireless network system
US20150189613A1 (en) * 2013-12-30 2015-07-02 Mediatek Inc. Apparatuses and methods for physical broadcast channel (pbch) assisted synchronization during a discontinuous reception (drx) operation
CN114223168A (en) * 2019-08-12 2022-03-22 高通股份有限公司 Interaction of Discontinuous Reception (DRX) with Positioning Reference Signal (PRS) resources

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
INTERDIGITAL INC.: "Discussion on Positioning in RRC Idle/Inactive mode", 3GPP DRAFT; R2-2100374, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG2, no. Electronic; 20210125 - 20210205, 15 January 2021 (2021-01-15), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051973560 *
OPPO: "Discussion on eDRX for RedCap UEs", 3GPP DRAFT; R2-2102736, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG2, no. electronic; 20210412 - 20210420, 2 April 2021 (2021-04-02), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP052174339 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117544977A (en) 2024-02-09

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022126546A1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus, communication device, and storage medium
CN111107612B (en) Method and device for configuring bandwidth part
US20220399973A1 (en) Reference Signal Transmission Method and Related Device
WO2023274070A1 (en) Positioning measurement method and positioning configuration method and apparatuses, and communication device
US20230337315A1 (en) Reference signal configuration method and apparatus, and terminal
WO2024027678A1 (en) Extended discontinuous reception configuration method, apparatus and communication device
TWI590603B (en) Machine type communication (mtc) devices, service networks, and methods for configuring periodic update timers
WO2024140575A1 (en) Signal listening method, and terminal and network-side device
WO2024027554A1 (en) Positioning processing method and apparatus, device, and readable storage medium
WO2023185851A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus, and related device
WO2024022316A1 (en) Downlink reference signal sending method, apparatus, terminal and network side device
WO2024002350A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting sidelink positioning reference signal
WO2024027589A1 (en) Method for determining synchronization source of wake-up signal, terminal and network-side device
WO2024027546A1 (en) Positioning method and apparatus and device
WO2024119415A1 (en) Wake-up signal receiving and sending methods and apparatuses
WO2023179472A1 (en) Information sending method, information receiving method, sending end, and receiving end
WO2024001939A1 (en) Uplink signal transmission method, terminal, and network side device
WO2024131735A1 (en) Signal processing methods and apparatus, terminal and network side device
WO2023143303A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining effective duration of reference signal, and terminal
WO2024140569A1 (en) Communication operation execution method and apparatus, and terminal
WO2024119414A1 (en) Method and apparatus for listening for wake-up signal
WO2024012275A1 (en) Notification processing method and apparatus, notification method and apparatus, and terminal and network-side device
WO2023143413A1 (en) Synchronization signal block receiving method, synchronization signal block sending method, and related device
WO2023185845A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus, and related device
WO2023130482A1 (en) Reference signal availability indication method and apparatus, network element device, terminal and storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23849385

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1